Manual Gl317x Rph2

7/17/2019 Manual Gl317x Rph2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manual-gl317x-rph2 1/419

Content

Instruction Manual

D1821EN/011/8

10- 2013© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in th is do cument is in dicative only. No representatio n or warranty is g iven or s hould be relied onthat it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided withoutliability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

GRID

SF6 circuitbreaker

GL317X With spring operating mechanisms

FK3-5

This equipment contains Fluorinated Greenhouse Gas (SF6) covered by the Kyoto Protocol, which hasa Global Warming Potential (GWP) of 22200.SF6 should be recovered and not released into the atmosphere.For further information on the use and handling of SF 6, please refer to IEC 62271: High-VoltageSwitchgear and Controlgear - Part 303: Use and Handling of Sulphur Hexafluoride (SF 6).

Administrator First issue Compiled by Approved by

AHT 23- 10- 2013 J. Bossu V. Texier



Content

Instruction Manual

D1821EN/012/8


GRID

This page is intentionally blank.



Content

Instruction Manual

D1821EN/013/8


GRID

Safety

Product safety sheets Annexes

Technical data

Technical characteristics Rating plate

Description and operation

General description of the circuitbreaker L12- 0012EN / 01

Description of the interrupting chambers L12- 105EN / 03

Pole operation (interrupting principle) L13- 005EN / 03

Operating device of circuitbreaker L14- 006EN / 03

SF6 gas monitoring L20- 001EN / 07

Packaging - Shipping and storage

Packaging - Identification - Storage L22- 051EN / 01



Content

Instruction Manual

D1821EN/014/8


GRID

Installation

Erection general instructions L30- 002EN / 02

Tightening torques L31- 001EN / 02

Erection general procedures L31- 003EN / 02

Checking for presence of nitrogen (N2) in pole parts L31- 064EN / 04

The installation procedure (advised), developed

below, imposes a lifting equipment with the followingcharacteristics :

NOTE : If it is impossible to obtain the advoc-ated lifting equipment, one “complementary instal-lation procedure” is supplied in annexes.

3,000 daN)(minimum)

H + 2 m

HH + 1 m

Supporting frame assembly L31- 137EN/03

Coupling of column and chambers L31- 7137EN / 01

Tipping down the pole of the circuit- breakerand vacuum operation

L31- 721EN / 03

Installation of terminals with preparationof contact surfaces

L31- 733EN / 03

Installation of capacitors L31- 748EN/01

Installation of stress- shieldson the interrupting chambers

L31- 7509EN / 01

Lifting and positioning the pole L31- 7606EN/03

Installation of operating device L31- 7902EN/01

Continued on next page.



Content

Instruction Manual

D1821EN/015/8


GRID

Installation, continued

Connection the vacuum pump L31- 853EN/03

Installing the synchronous device RPH2 L31- 871EN / 02

RPH2 - Correspondence between C.B. poles andthe network phases and the phase measuring thereference voltage

L31- 872EN / 02

Vacuum operation L31- 881EN / 03

Calculation of the SF6 gas filling pressurefor using the pressure gauge (tool)

L31- 924EN / 02

Pre- filling with SF6 gas at 0.05 MPa L31- 951EN / 05

Filling with SF6 gas L32- 007EN / 05



Content

Instruction Manual

D1821EN/016/8


GRID

Commissioning

Pre- commissioning inspections L34- 011EN / 06

Commissioning test report RES 310 M EN / 10

Commissioning check listRPH2 maintenance

RES 310 M RPH2EN

Acceptance criteria CAEN 103 271/3/010

Maintenance

Maintenance plan L51- 004EN / 05

Electrical wear limits L51- 053EN / 03

Electrical contact densimeter threshold inspection L51- 108EN / 05

Intervention on the operating device L51- 304EN / 04



Content

Instruction Manual

D1821EN/017/8


GRID

Annexes

Tooling and accessories L60- 028EN / 02

Product safety sheets PS0000/EN

RPH2 - Outline drawing 58.001.115- 01

RPH2 - Wiring diagram (2SA0) 58.010.111- 16EN

RPH2 - Service manual 58.020.034 EN

Check- list Commissioningmaintenance RPH2

58.020.035- EN

End of equipment service life

Dismantling and recovery of componentsfrom a circuit breaker

L80- 000EN / 02

Managing of SF6 gas L80- 001EN / 02

Guidelines for the handling of used SF6 gasand its secondary products

L81- 001EN / 02



Content

Instruction Manual

D1821EN/018/8


GRID

Complementary installation procedure

The complementary installation procedure,

developedbelow, imposes a lifting equipment withthefollowing characteristics :

+

3,000 daN)

(minimum)

H + 2 m

H

Supporting frame assembly L31- 138EN/03

Lifting and positioning the pole L31- 200EN/06

Installation of terminals with preparationof contact surfaces

L31- 504EN / 03

Installation of capacitors L31- 605EN/02

Installation of stress- shieldson the interrupting chambers

L31- 664EN / 02

Coupling of column and chambers L31- 7138EN / 01

Installation of operating device L31- 7902EN/01

Installation, continued




General description of the circuit--breaker

L12--0012EN/011/6

11--2012© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in th is do cument is in dicative only. No representatio n or warranty is g iven or s hould be relied onthat it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided withoutliability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

GRID

Circuit--breaker GL317X with spring operating mechanism FK3--5

Description The circuit--breaker is made up of three poles, each activated by a spring

operating mechanism.

Diagram

A

CB

D

Parts table The table below gives the main parts of the circuit--breaker :

Mark Component Page

A Pole of the circuit--breaker 2

B Bearing structure 3

C Operating device 4

D Marshalling cubicle 5





L12--0012EN/012/6


GRID

Pole of the circuit --breaker

Description The pole of the circuit--breaker is made up with three main components :

S The interrupting chambers (1).

S The support column (2).

S The housing of the mechanism (3).

Diagram

6

7

4

4

5 7 13

3

8

3

2

1

1

Interruptingchambers

The pole is comprised of two interrupting chambers (1) -- in a ceramic envel-ope -- equipped at each end with a HV terminal (5).The interrupting chambers are laid out horizontally and attached, at theirbase, to a common housing (6). This housing contains the mechanism usedto transfer the operating movement to the mobile contacts of both chambers.The interrupting can also be equipped with capacitors (7) and a corona ring(4).

Support column Consisting of two, three or four ceramic insulators, the support column allowsthe circuit--breaker to be ground--insulated and it also encloses the operatingtie--rod which is attached to the interrupting chamber’s moving contacts.The support column can also be equipped with a corona ring (13).

Housing of themechanism

A housing (3) -- situated at the base of the column -- contains the lever andcrank assembly and which operates the moving contact.The SF6 filling and monitoring device (8) is also situated on the housing.





L12--0012EN/013/6


GRID

Bearing structure

Description The support--frame (10) -- made up with four supports fastenedto the housing

(3) -- supports all the circuit--breaker components.The support--frame may be supplied by either ALSTOM Grid or the custom-ers.

Diagram

10

3





L12--0012EN/014/6


GRID

Operating device

Description Theoperating device (11) is a spring operating mechanism of the FK3--5 type.

The door of the operating device (11) is equipped with two windows. Thesewindows permit to display the optical signalization of the circuit--breaker stateand closing spring state.

Diagram3

11

Fastening The operating device is fastened on the housing (3).





L12--0012EN/015/6


GRID

Marshalling cubicle

Description The marshalling cubicle (D) is fastened on the ground near the central

pole. Included with :

S The relays required to operate the circuit--breaker.

S The interconnection terminals boards.

S The terminals boards.

Diagram

D





L12--0012EN/016/6


GRID





Description of the interrupting chambers

L12--105EN/031/4

01--2011© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should berelied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It isprovided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, isstrictly prohibited. GRID

Presentation

Diagram

B

A

Parts table The table below gives the main parts of the interrupting chambers :

Mark Component Page

A Interrupting chamber 2

B Upper housing 3





L12--105EN/032/4


Interrupting chamber

Quenching medium The quenching medium is pressurized SF6 gas or -- in particular instances --

pressurized SF6+CF4 gas mixture.

Interrupting principle The interrupting chamber is of thermal blasting type, using the energy fromthe arc, with an auxiliary autopneumatic effect.

Diagram

421

Description The interrupting chamber has been designed in such a way as to increase themechanical resistance of the working part and take advantage of the low wearrate of the contacts subjected to the arc in SF

6. The working part is enclosed

in a leak tight ceramic envelope, providing insulation between thecircuit--breaker input and output.The chamber is made up of the following elements :

Mark Component Information

(1) Envelope Can have a long creepagedistance, depending on thepollution level.

(2) Fixed contact

(4) Moving contact It is worked by the operatingmechanism and contains the

blasting device.





L12--105EN/033/4


Upper housing

Description The upper housing encloses the movement transfer mechanism (15) from the

operating tie--rod (8) to the moving contact (4) of the two chambers.

Diagram

15

8

44

Parts table The table below gives the housing internal and peripheral components :

Mark Component Function

(4) Moving contact It is worked by the operatingmechanism and contains the blastingdevice.

(8) Operating tie--rod Transmits the movement to the movingcontact of the two chambers.

(15) Mechanism Transfer of the movement.





L12--105EN/034/4






Pole operation

(Interrupting principle)

L13--005EN/031/6


Presentation

Introduction In “CLOSED” position the current passes through :

-- the terminal (1),

-- the fixed contact support (2),

-- the main contacts (3),

-- the moving contact (4),

-- the moving contact support (5),

-- the common housing (6),

and follows the opposite chain on the other chamber and the terminal (1).

11 6

2 53

1 4

KAPANIŞ YAYI "DONATILMIŞ"

CLOSING SPRING “ LOADED” CIRCUIT--BREAKER “ CLOSED” ПРЕКЪСВАЧ "ЗАТВОРЕН"

In this module This module contains the stages of the pole operation :

Stage Page

Opening 2

Closing 5




Pole operation


L13--005EN/032/6


Opening

Opening When an electrical or manual opening order is given, the energy accumulated

in the opening spring (7) is released.

The insulating tie--rod (8), directly activated by the opening spring (7),transmits the movement to the transfer mechanism (9) inside the housingwhich causes the contacts to separate simultaneously in both chambers.

7

8

9





Pole operation


L13--005EN/033/6


Opening, continued

Operation The table below gives the stages of opening :

Stage Description

Start of opening When the moving contact (4) separates from the maincontacts (3), the current is switched onto the arccontacts (10). The compression of the (Vp) volumecauses the first rise of pressure.

103 4 Vp

Thermal effect When the contacts (10) separate, the arc appears andits energy causes the pressure to rise in the thermalexpansion volume (Vt), closed by the fixed contact rod(11) and the insulating nozzle (12).

12 10 Vt11

Interrupting andassistanceat opening

When the rod (11) comes out of the nozzle (12), thethermal overpressure in the volume (Vt) is releasedcausing an energy blast to occur, just before thecurrent zero passage, ensuring final quenching of thearc. The (Vp) volume pressure decreases to theambient pressure by means of the valve (13) to allowthe end of the opening.

Vt Vp 1311 12





Pole operation


L13--005EN/034/6


Opening, continued

Molecular sieve The arc has been extinguished.

The SF6 molecules, separated by the arc, are re--formed instantaneously.Residual gases left over from the interruption operation are adsorbed by themolecular sieve situated at the base of the pole. A few powdery compoundsare deposited in the form of dust which is quite harmless for the circuitbreaker.

Special caseof small currents

For small currents (example : operating no--load lines, transformers orcapacitor banks), the thermal energy of the arc is too low to provide enoughexcess pressure.Consequently, the conventional autopneumatic effect developing in thevolume (Vp) is used mainly, to blast the arc.

Vp




Pole operation


L13--005EN/035/6


Closing

Description When an electrical or manual closing order is given, the energy accumulated

in the closing spring (15) -- situated inside the operating device -- is released.This energy is transmitted directly to the pole operating shaft (16), to ensureclosing.The release of the energy stored up in the closing spring (15) causesdisplacement of the moving parts -- and so the closing of the interruptingchambers -- and also reloads the opening spring (7).

16

7

9

15




Pole operation


L13--005EN/036/6






Operating device of circuit --breaker

L14--006EN/03

1/6


Presentation

Introduction The operating device is a spring operating mechanism of type FK3--5.

The operating mechanism is usually electrically remote--controlled.During commissioning or when auxiliary voltage is lacking, operations canalso be performed directly on the mechanism.

Warning OPERATION AUTHORIZED ONLY IF THE OPERATING DEVICE IS CON-NECTED TO THE CIRCUIT BREAKER.THE CIRCUIT BREAKER MUST NOT BE OPERATED AT A SF6 PRES-SURE GAS LOWER THAN THE MINIMAL PRESSURE FOR THE INSULA-TION pme.

In this module This module contains the following topics :

Topic Page

Description of the mechanism 2

Auxiliary fittings 3

Operating principle 5





L14--006EN/03

2/6


Description of the mechanism

Drive shaft D The main shaft (1) is linked up to the the circuit--breaker pole by meansof a cylinder (2).

D A damper (4) is linked up to the lever (32).

D In the “CLOSED” position, the main shaft (1) rests on the opening latch(6) by means of the lever (5).

D In the “OPEN” position, the lever with roller (11) rests on the closingcam (10).

D The opening spring (3) activates the lever (33) by means of the chain(34). This spring is a pressure helical type.

NOTE : The levers (5)--(11)--(32) (33) form one piece only.

Closing shaft D On the closing shaft (7) are placed :

-- The inertia flywheel (8).

-- The closing cam (10).

-- The cam (26) that engages the limit switch (17) of the motor (12).

D The closing spring (9) activates the inertia flywheel (8) by means of thechain (15). This spring is a pressure helical type.

The rotation torque -- created on the inertia flywheel (8) by means of theloaded closing spring (9) -- is balanced by closing latch (14) / roller (16).

33

Diagram

11

34

5

32

33 17 12

34

2

1

26

32

7

30

10

14

8

11

5

31

6

33

3

15

17

9

12

16

11

4





L14--006EN/03

3/6


Auxiliary fittings

Reloading the closing

spring

The closing spring (9) is loaded by means of the reducing gears (13) and the

motor (12).

Auxiliary electricfittings

D The auxiliary contacts (30) are activated by a rod and a lever (31), the lat-ter is activated by the main shaft (1).

D The limit switch of the motor (17) is activated by the cam (26)The cam (26) is installed on the closing shaft (7).

D The closing latch (14) and the opening latch (6) are electrically activatedby coils (22) “Closing” and (27) “Opening”.

Auxiliary mechanicalfittings D The operating mechanism can be activated by the manual levers (24)“Closing” and (28) “Opening”.WARNING : Operating the mechanism by the manual levers (24) “Closing”and (28) “Opening” overrides electrical interlocks. Ensure it is electrically safeto operate the equipment when using these levers to defeat electrical inter-locks and lockouts.

D The indicator (29) gives the“OPEN” or “CLOSED” positions of the circuit---breaker. An operation counter (36) gives the number of realized operations.

D The indicator (23) gives the “CHARGED” or “DISCHARGED” states of theclosing spring.

D If the auxiliary current supply fails, the hand--held crank (21) permits theclosing spring to be fully charged.

Diagram

28

7

26

24

30

22

13

14

17

34

23

29

9

12

21

6

31

27

1





L14--006EN/03

4/6


Operating principle

Warning OPERATION AUTHORIZED ONLY IF THE OPERATING DEVICE IS CON-

NECTED TO THE CIRCUIT BREAKER.THE CIRCUIT BREAKER MUST NOT BE OPERATED AT A SF6 PRES-SURE GAS LOWER THAN THE MINIMAL PRESSURE FOR THE INSULA-TION pme.

Closing D When the closing coil is energized or the manual closing lever is operated,the closing latch (14) releases the inertia flywheel (8).

D The closing shaft (7) effects a 180° rotation generated by the loaded clos-ing spring (9).

D The cam (10) rotates the main shaft (1) by means of the lever with roller

(11). After a 60°

rotation, the lever (5) rests on the opening latch (6).D Simultaneously, theopening spring (3) is loaded by means of the chain (34)activated by the rotation of the lever (33).

D A freewheel, installed on the gear wheel (19), avoids the reducing gears(13) and the motor (12) being driven by the gear wheel of the inertia flywheel(8).

NOTE : A mechanical device (not shown) prevents all closing opera-tions if the circuit--breaker is already in the “CLOSED” position.

Diagram

2711

10

34

22

13

8

9

12

19 14

6

3

1

28

7

5

24

33






L14--006EN/03

5/6


Operating principle, continued

Reloading the closing

springD When the motor (12) is supplied with current, it immediately starts to loadthe closing spring (9) by means of the reducing gears (13) of the inertia fly-wheel (8) and the chain (15).

D At the full stroke, the gear(19) isat the notooth sectorof the inertiaflywheel(8) and the reducing gears (13) can decelerate without causing strain on theclosing latch (14).

NOTE : During the loading of the closing spring, the supplying circuitof the closing coil is cut to avoid an untimely closing operation.

Diagram

13

9

12 19

8

15

8

14

19






L14--006EN/03

6/6


Operating principle, continued

Opening D When the opening coil (27) is energized or the manual opening lever (28)is operated, the opening latch (6) releases the lever (5).

D The main shaft (1) effects a 60° clockwise rotation -- generated by theloaded opening spring (3) -- before reaching the circuit--breaker “OPEN” posi-tion.

D A damper (4) dampens the excess energy to smoothly finish travel.

Diagram

27

6

3

1

5

28

4

60°




SF6 gas monitoring

L20--001EN/071/6


Presentation

Introduction The circuit--breaker uses pressurized SF6 gas as electric arc quenching gas.

The SF6 gas pressure monitoring is essential to assure the circuit--breakerperformances.

Principle There is two SF6 gas pressure monitoring types :

D Permanent monitoring with the help of a threshold densimeter.

D Periodic monitoring with the help of a dial densimeter (visual control)

Symbols IEC symbols for the apparatus technical characteristics.

Symbol Designation pre Filling rated pressure for the insulation

pae Alarm pressure for the insulation

pme Minimal pressure for the insulation


Topic Page

Gas pressure and density 2

Pressure measurement 3

Measuring density 4

Densimeter 5




SF6 gas monitoring

L20--001EN/072/6


Gas pressure and density

Introduction The electrical characteristics of switchgear depend on the density of SF6 gas

i.e. the mass of gas pumped into a compartment of a given volume.

Constanttemperature

At constant temperature, an increase of gas density results in a higher gaspressure against the walls of compartment.

Constant density At constant density, with an fixed compartment volume, the pressurechanges in the same way as the temperature. Since the gas densityremains invariable owing to the fact that no modification occurs in thequantity of gas or the volume of the relevant compartment, the electricalcharacteristics of the switchgear will remain unchanged.

Conclusion Since it is difficult to measure the gas density directly, it is essential toknow accurately its absolute pressure and temperature.




SF6 gas monitoring

L20--001EN/073/6


Pressure measurement

Effective pressure ?

Absolute pressure ?

Absolute pressure = effective pressure + atmospheric pressure

Pressure Description Diagram

Effective

The pressure of SF6 gas ismeasured by of a standardpressure gauge with adeformable diaphragm actuatingan indicating pointer.One surface of the diaphragm isin contact with the SF6 gas, whilethe other is in contact with theatmosphere. The differencebetween the gas and theatmosphere is thus measured,taking atmospheric pressure as areference. This is themeasurement of the effectivepressure of the SF6 gas.

SF6

Atmospheric pressure

Standard pressure gauge

Absolute

If the deformable diaphragm, onesurface of which is in contact withthe SF6 gas, blocks a volumewhere a vacuum has beendeveloped, the pressure gauge

measures the pressuredifference between that of theSF6 gas and the vacuum. Sincethe latter is zero, the pressuregauge measures the absolutepressure of the gas.The absolute pressure of the SF6

gas, independent of atmosphericpressure, reflects the quantity of gas introduced into thecompartment and hence itsdensity at the presenttemperature.

This is measured by means of anabsolute pressure gauge whichis less generally used and moredelicate than a effective pressuregauge. This is the reason why aeffective pressure gauge is used,provision being made forcorrections required byatmospheric pressure variationsresulting from atmosphericdisturbances and differences of elevation.

SF6

Vacuum volume

Absolutepressure gauge




SF6 gas monitoring

L20--001EN/074/6


Measuring density

Pressure units D The international unit pressure is the Pascal (Pa).

D The practical unit is the bar (14.503 p.s.i.)

1 bar = 1,000 hPa1 bar = 100 kPa10 bar = 1 MPa

D Standard atmospheric pressure is equal to 101.3 kPa at sea level and anair temperature of 20°C (68°F).

Measuring density When it is not possible to directly measure density, this may be checkedusing an industrial pressure gauge capable of measuring the effectivepressure.

An effective pressure value corresponds to the rated density, determinedfor normal atmospheric pressure (101.3 kPa) and an ambient temperatureof 20°C (68°F).

For each pressure reading (filling, inspection of densimeter thresholds...), therated effective pressure should be corrected according to the ambienttemperature and atmospheric pressure of the site at the time the reading istaken. See the module “Calculation of the SF6 gas filling pressure tousing the pressure gauge (tool)”.

The real pressure is therefore :

Preal = Prated effective in accordance with temperature + ΔPp *

* ΔPp : correction in accordance with atmospheric pressure.




SF6 gas monitoring

L20--001EN/075/6


Densimeter

Function D Permanent SF6

gas density monitoring.

D Visual SF6 gas real pressure information (MPa -- psi).

Localization The densimeter is situated onto the bottom of the pole of the circuit--breaker,and joined to the gas volume of the circuit--breaker.

Working The densimeter is fitted with internal contacts. These contacts closesuccessively if the gas’s density diminishes and determine 2 distinctthresholds. These contacts are wired to the terminal block inside the cubicleand are usually left at the user’s disposal for the following use :

D Alarm pressure ” pae” acts as a warning (topping up necessary).

D Minimum functional pressure for insulation ” pme” must be used either tolock the circuit--breaker in position or to cause automatic opening. The optionis chosen by the client in keeping with operating requirements.

All the circuit--breaker’s rated performances are guaranteed up to theminimum specified ambient temperature and the minimum functionalpressure for insulation ” pme”.





SF6 gas monitoring

L20--001EN/076/6


Densimeter, continued

Reading the dial The dial is divided into three colored areas : Green, Yellow and Red. The

position of the needle indicates the SF6 gas absolute pressure value.

0

-1

Needle position Colored area Direction

GREEN None

YELLOW Perform a topping--up

operation.

RED

Abnormally low density,find the origin of the

leak and contactALSTOM Grid

After--sales Service.



Packaging -- Shipping and storage

Packaging -- Identification -- Storage

L22--051EN/011/6


Presentation

Information The different parts of the poles (chambers and column) are filled with nitrogen

(N2) for transport purposes to an effective pressure of 0.03 MPa at 20°C(68°F).


Topic Page

Packaging 2

Identifying sub-- assemblies and their packaging 3

Storage 4





L22--051EN/012/6


Packaging

Introduction For transport, the different parts of the apparatus are divided--up between

several cases :S Interrupting chambers + (corona rings chambers).

S Columns + (corona rings, electrical connections ...).

S Operating devices : each operating device is wrapped in a protective bag.

S Frames if the latter is supplied by ALSTOM Grid.

S The SF6 bottle(s) or -- in particular instances -- SF6 bottle(s) and CF4bottle(s).

S Marshalling cubicle.

S Assembly products (grease, oil, etc.) used for installation.

S Capacitors (if the apparatus is equipped with these).

Characteristics ofpackaging cases

The table below gives the characteristics of the circuit--breaker componentspackaging cases depending on the apparatus :

Packaging case type Qty Length

cmWidth

cmHeight

cmGross weight

kg

Interrupting chambers x 3

1 513 181 136

Interrupting chamberswith resistors *

x 3

1 706 218 133

Columns

(2 insulators)

1 503 188 108

Columns(3 insulators)

1 532 191 105

Columns(4 insulators)

1 627 191 105

Frame(H = 2503 mm)

1 308 96 96

Frame(H = 3377 mm)

1 396 96 96

Frame(H = 4877 mm)

1 546 96 96

Operating device 3 102 85 128

SF6 gas *

(SF6+CF4)gas

mixture

SF6 gas *

CF4 gas *

Marshalling cubicle 1 131 76 172 284

Necessities (products)for assembly

1 60 60 70 37

Capacitors * 1 266 141 124

* Depending of the apparatus

NOTE : the values in the above table are given as an indication sothat an appropriate means of lifting can be envisaged.





L22--051EN/013/6


Identifying sub --assemblies and their packaging

Introduction Each circuit--breaker sub--assembly (poles, operating mechanism, etc.) is

identified by a plate giving its reference numbers.These numbers are marked on the packaging cases of each sub--assembly.

Example of markingand identifying

-- Manufacturer reference No. = 101 525

-- Circuit--breaker identification No. 1

-- Pole No. 2

101 525 0010

no SÉRIE

Rep. 01/2

101 525 0010

MANUFACTURERREFERENCE No.

POLE No.

MARKING OFPACKAGING CASES

IDENTIFICATION OFSUB--ASSEMBLIES AND

TOOLING

1

2

0101

CIRCUIT--BREAKERIDENTIFICATION No.

CASE No.

Place of the plates Choose and install the components identified by the plate (1).

OUTSIDE PLATE

INSIDE PLATE

101 525 0010

Rep. 01/2

no SÉRIE

1





L22--051EN/014/6


Storage

Introduction The storage procedures defined below are for storage times of less than 2

years. For longer periods, special packaging must be designed and appropri-ate procedures devised.

Short--term storage(6 months)

Theapparatus must be stored in its transport packaging and placed on beamsin a flood--proof place.

Medium--term storage(less than 2 years)

The table below indicate how to stock the main components of the circuit--breaker for a medium--term storage :

Component Storage

Componentsof the circuit--breaker pole

The apparatus must be stored with itstransport packaging open whilstplaced on beams in a closed (indoor),but ventilated, flood--proof place.

Operating device

The operating device should bestored in the same place as the cir-cuit--breaker, these two sub--assem-blies being inseparable. Check thatthe packaging is leak--tight.If this has been damaged, proceed asfollows :

S The operating device should beplaced so that air can enter throughthe vents of the rear plate and sidepanels.

S In order to prevent corrosiondamage due to formation of condensation, it is mandatory that theheating circuit be switched on.






L22--051EN/015/6


Storage

Centralizing cubicle

The centralizing cubicle should bestored in the same place as the cir-cuit--breaker and the operatingdevice, these three sub--assembliesbeing inseparable.

S In order to prevent corrosiondamage due to formation of condensation, it is mandatory that theheating circuit be switched on. Putvetically the centtralizing cubicle forthat air can enter through the vents.

ANY CHANGE OF LOCATION OF THE APPARATUS (EVEN AFTER COM-MISSIONING) SHOULD BE DONE AT A REDUCED PRESSURE OF0.03 MPa.





L22--051EN/016/6





Installation

Erection general instructions

L30--002EN/021/2



Instructions

of environment

The table below gives the instructions of environment to respect for the

erection :

Instruction Comment

A

Verify the Civil engineering work : dimensions,levels of concrete pads (structure fixation), inaccordance with the tolerances given by Civilwork standards (refer to circuit--breakeroutline).

B Avoid any dust production and masonry work

during erection of the circuit--breaker.

Erectioninstructions

The table below gives the instructions to respect for proper erection of thecircuit--breaker :

Instruction Comment

1

Read all the “Installation” modules completelybefore beginning erection works.The erection instructions describe all theprocedures to be carried out as well as their

chronological order.

2 Handle sub--assemblies in a correct manner,

particularly insulators.

3

The shipping case should be open as requiredduring erection procedures.CAUTION : Respect sub--assembliesidentification.

4

When shipping covers are removed, proceed tothe next assembly sequence in as short aspossible time.Store the shipping covers under shelter, for apossible future use.

5 Respect references to other modules,

i.e. :“Tightening torques”.

Warning No responsibility is taken over by ALSTOM Grid for damages anddisturbances resulting out of non--adherence to the “Installation” modules.



Installation


L30--002EN/022/2





Installation

Tightening torques

L31--001EN/021/4


Presentation

Introduction In the assembling with screws, all the fastening screws must be “greased”

before torque tightening.

Products used The table below gives the list of the used products for the screws beforetightening :

Designation ALSTOM Griditem

reference

Supplier Supplier itemreference

Grease --01835208

(1kg box) MOBIL OIL

MOBILPLEX 47MOBILUX EP3

Contact grease

--01835118

(200g tube) EPMF

CONTACTAL

HPG

Silicon grease --01835265

(100g tube) SAMARO MOLYKOTE 111

Glue --01818327

(250 ml) LOCTITE LOCTITE 225


Topic Page

Screw greasing before tightening 2

Tightening torques values 3



Installation

Tightening torques

L31--001EN/022/4


Screw greasing before tightening

Choice of the

product to use

The table below gives the product to use for the screws before tightening

depending on the assembling type :

If assembling... Product to use ...

usual MOBILPLEX 47

MOBILUX EP3

electrical connections CONTACTAL HPG

with seals

Can bedismantled ?

Product ...

YES MOLYKOTE 111

NO LOCTITE 225

Where to applythe product ?

The table below indicates the part of the screws to treat with the appropriateproduct before tightening depending on the assembling type :

If assembling... With screws With bolts

usual

electrical connections

Tapping or threading

Tapping or threadingwith seals



Installation

Tightening torques

L31--001EN/023/4


Tightening torques values

Values table The tool and the tightening method must be such that the torque actually

applied to the screw head corresponds with thereference torque shown in thetable below, to within a tolerance of ± 20%.

TIGHTENING TORQUESin daN.m

STEEL SCREWS

CLASS 6.8or

STAINLESS A2--70, A4--70STAINLESS A2--80, A4--80

CLASS 8.8

M2,5 0,05 0,06

M3 0,09 0,11

M4 0,19 0,26

M5 0,38 0,51

M6 0,66 0,88

M8 1,58 2,11

M10 3,20 4,27

M12 4,97 6,63

M14 8,67 11,56

M16 13,42 17,90

M20 26,22 34,98

M24 45,68 60,93

M30 90,44 120,65



Installation

Tightening torques

L31--001EN/024/4





Installation

Erection general procedures

L31--003EN/021/6


Presentation

Introduction During the erection of the circuit--breaker, some particular mounting or

checking operations will be realized.


Topic Page

Preparing and installing static seals 2

Screw sealing 3

Using a water pressure gauge 5



Installation


L31--003EN/022/6


Preparing and installing static seals

Necessary products List of the ALSTOM Grid products necessary for the installing :

ALSTOMGrid

referenceDiagram Designation

--01861262 Can of ISOPROPANOL (1l)

--01835265 MOLYKOTE 111 (100g tube)

Process The table below gives the steps of installing static seals :Step Action Comment

1 Clean bearing grooves andsurfaces using ISOPROPANOL.

2 Rid the seal of all foreign bodiessuch as paintbrush bristles orfilings...Remove (where applicable) thecolor identification point withfingernail, never with a sharpinstrument.

Check the condition of the sealwhich should present noscratches or deformation (itshould be neither flattened,stretched, nor broken).

3 Lightly lubricate the seal by hand

using MOLYKOTE 111 grease.

Do not use a brush to do this.

Eliminate excess grease bysqueezing the seal betweenfingers, leaving only a thin layeron the entire surface.

4 Put the seal(s) in place.

5 Lubricate both bearing surfaceswith MOLYKOTE 111.Fill the residual volume of theseal’s outside groove with grease.

Do not put grease on the insidesurface.

Only seals aregreased in this

zone

Greasingzone Greasingzone



Installation


L31--003EN/023/6


Screw sealing

Introduction To prevent humidity from penetrating SF6 gaskets, the outer mounting screws

should be sealed by applying an appropriate product.

NOTE : This procedure should be applied to all assemblages of partssubmitted to SF6 pressure and electrical connection assembling.

Necessary products List of the ALSTOM Grid products and accessories necessary for the screwsealing :

ALSTOMGrid


--01818327 LOCTITE 225 (250ml)

--01835265 MOLYKOTE 111 (100g tube)

--01835118 CONTACTAL HPG (200g tube)

Choice of theproduct to use

The table below gives the product to use for the screw sealing depending onthe assembling type :

If assembling... Product to use ...

with seals

Can bedismantled ?

Product ...

YES MOLYKOTE 111

NO LOCTITE 225

electrical connections CONTACTAL HPG




Installation


L31--003EN/024/6


Screw sealing, continued

Where to apply

the product ?

The table below indicates the part of the screws to treat with the appropriate

product before tightening depending on the assembling type :

Assembling with screws Assembling with bolts





Installation


L31--003EN/025/6


Using a water pressure gauge

Introduction In each assemblage performed using a double seal (1) and (2), the volume

(3) communicates with the outside by a channel (4), blocked--off by a plug (5)or (6), so that leak--tightness can be checked.

65

1

3

2

4

Process The table below gives the steps of the leak--tightness checking using a waterpressure gauge :

Step Action Diagram

1 Remove the leak test plug (5) or (6)and its seal (7) if necessary, leaveopen for half an hour.

2...3 turns

5 7

6

2 Connect up the water pressuregauge

(8), using the adapter (9) or (10).

9

10

8

3 Fillthe water pressure gauge’s U tubeto half way up.

NOTE : If temperature is lessthan 0°C, use an anti--freeze mix-ture instead of water.

D After a few minutes note the water

column level R1.D Note the water column level R2again after half an hour.The displacement H should be lessthan 10 mm.

H

R1

R2

4 At the end of the inspection, pull theadapter of the water pressure gaugeand replace theleak test plug (5) or (6)and its seal (7), where required. 5

7

6



Installation


L31--003EN/026/6





Installation

Checking for presence of nitrogen (N2 )

in pole parts

L31- 064EN/041/4

04- 2013© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in th is do cument is in dicative only. No representatio n or warranty is g iven or s hould be reliedon that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is providedwithout liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictlyprohibited. GRID

Presentation

Introduction The pole parts (chambers and columns) are filled with nitrogen (N2) for trans-

port purposes to an effective pressure of 0.03 MPa at 20°C.

It is of prime importance that the presence of N2 gas in pole be verifiedbefore going any further with installation.

Necessary tools List of the necessary ALSTOM Grid tools for the checking for presence of N2gas in poles :

Mark Diagram Designation Number

(3) Filling tool 1


Topic Page

Checking for presence of N2 gas in columns 2

Checking for presence of N2 gas in interrupting chambers 4



Installation


in pole parts

L31- 064EN/042/4


Checking for presence of N2 gas in columns

Opening the case of

the columns Remove only the cover of the case. Remove packaging protection, tofree the housing (7) of the column.

NOTE : Keep the packaging protection , for later utilization.

7

Visual inspectionof the column

Begin visual inspection to check the condition of ceramic envelopes. Makesure that their enamel has not been chipped or in any way damaged duringtransportation.




Installation


in pole parts

L31- 064EN/043/4


Checking for presence of N2 gas in columns, continued

Process The table below gives the steps of manual checking for presence of N2 gas

in columns :

Step Action Diagram

1 Removethe plug (1) and installthe filling tool (3), tighten thefilling tool BY HAND.

31

2 Unscrew the valve-cap (4) andpress on the valve briefly :some gas should escape.

If no gas is expelled, contactour Customer Service.

4

3 D Replace the valve- cap (4)and remove the filling tool (3).

D Re- install the plug (1), ap-plying a tightening torque of 4 daN.m; leaktightness isonly guaranteed if this condi-tion is respected.

1

34



Installation


in pole parts

L31- 064EN/044/4


Checking for presence of N2 gas in interrupting chambers

Comment A transport cover (5) is installed on the housing (6) common to both interrup-

tion chambers. This cover is equipped with a test valve, in turn protected bya plug (8).

5

6

8

6

Process The table below gives the steps of checking for presence of N2 gas in theinter-

rupting chambers :

Step Action Diagram

1 Remove the plug (8) by undointhe screws (9) and briefly press othe valve clapper (7) : some gashould escape.

If no gas is expelled, contacour Customer Service.

7

8

9

2 Re- install the plug (8) using thescrews (9). 9

8

x 2

H M6-200,7 daN.m



Installation

Support--frame assembly

L31--137EN/031/10

06--2011© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied onthat it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided withoutliability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

GRID

Presentation

Reminder Frames may be supplied by either ALSTOM Grid or the customer.


Topic Page

Components necessary for the operation 2

Support--frame components (per pole) 3Preparing the column 5

Frame--support assembly 6

Installing the lifting tools 10



Installation


L31--137EN/032/10


GRID

Components necessary for the operation

Necessary product Grease MOBILPLEX 47 -- MOBILUX EP3 (screws greasing).

Necessary tools List of the tools necessary for the installing :


(1) Lifting strap

(3 m) 2

Handling The support--frame assembly operations andliftingthe pole should be performed by at least two per-sons.



Installation


L31--137EN/033/10


GRID

Support--frame components (per pole)

Introduction If the support--frame is supplied by ALSTOM Grid, check the necessary

components to the assembling.

Necessarycomponents

List of the ALSTOM Grid components necessary for the assembling :


(2) Support 2

(3) Support 2

(5) Screws

H M16-45 1

(7) Screws

H M16-35 16

(9) Washer

NORDLOCK NL16 SS 16




Installation


L31--137EN/034/10


GRID

Support--frame components (per pole), continued

Necessary

components,continued



(20) Screws

H M16-45 16

(21) Strengthening piece 2





Installation


L31--137EN/035/10


GRID

Preparing the column

Dismantling the case

of the poles

Remove the side panels of the case.

NOTE : The extraction of the columns will be in the order A, B andC.

Preparing the pole D Sling the “A” column with the aid of two flexible lifting straps (1).

D Extract the column from the case and put it down on the case wood coverlaying :-- first, the end of the column,-- second, the support of the operating mechanism (4) on a wedge to ensurethe correct installing of the frame supports.

X minimum = 260 mm

1

4

1

X



Installation


L31--137EN/036/10


GRID

Frame--support assembly

Process The table below gives the steps of installing the supports of the frame :

Step Action

1 With the aid of two flexible lifting straps, position the frame--support(3) onto the housing (10) and fasten it with the use of the screws (7)and NORDLOCK washers (9). Do not tighten the screws (7).-- Install the screw (5) only on this support.

10

3

2 x 2

H M16--35

79

x 1

H M16--455

2 With the aid of two flexible lifting straps, position the frame--support(2) onto the housing (10) and fasten it with the use of the screws (7)and NORDLOCK washers (9). Do not tighten the screws (7).

102

2 x 2

H M16--35

79




Installation


L31--137EN/037/10


GRID

Frame--support assembly, continued

Process, continued The table below gives the steps of installing the supports of the frame :

Step Action

3 Install the strengthening pieces (21)--(25) inside the frame--support(2) with the use of the screws (20). Adjust the distance between thesupports and fasten the strengthening pieces (21)--(25) on theframe--support (3). Do not tighten the screws (20).

2

2521

3

x 4

H M16--45

20


2 x 2

H M16--35

79

10

2

5 With the aid of two flexible lifting straps, position the frame--support

(3) onto the housing (10) and fasten it with the use of the screws (7)and NORDLOCK washers (9). Do not tighten the screws (7).

10

2 x 2

H M16--35

79

3




Installation


L31--137EN/038/10


GRID



Step Action


25

21H M16--45

202 x 2

3

2

25

21

7 Install the strengthening pieces (24) outside the frame--support withthe use of the screws (20).

24

24

24

24

x 220

H M16--45

x 2

20

H M16--45




Installation


L31--137EN/039/10


GRID



Step Action

8 Tighten all the screws to the recommended torques.

18 daN.m



Installation

Supporting frame assembly

L31--137EN/0310/10


GRID

Installing the lifting tools

Necessary tools List of the lifting tools to install on the frame :


(14) Lifting shackle 4

(15) Ring bolt 4

(16) Washer 8

Process The table below gives the steps of installing the lifting tools on the support--frame :

Step Action

1 Install the lifting shackle (14) in the holes of the frame.

2 Install the ring bolts (15) on the base of the frame, inserting the thickwashers (16).

x 4

15

16

14



Installation

Coupling of column and chambers

L31- 7137/EN011/18


Presentation

Markings Before coupling the chambers and column, check that the markings on the

breaking chambers correspond with those on the column

Time taken forcoupling operation

The final chamber/column coupling operations should be completed in atime of ≤ 40 min.

NOTE: The coupling operations must be carried out by a min-imum of two people.

T(max) 40 min

Lifting means Provide an adequate means of hoisting:3,000 daN (minimum)

H + 2 m

H

H +1 m

Stages of thecoupling operation

The chamber- column coupling operation can be broken down into a num-

ber of stages:Step Subject Page

A Positioning the chamber casing 2

B Preparing the breaking chambers 3

C Preparing the column’s corona shield 4

D Preparing the elements required for the coupling opera-

tion 5

E Hoisting and preparing the column 7

F Final coupling 8



Installation


L31- 7137/EN012/18


Positioning the chamber casing

Introduction To facilitate pole hoisting andto improve workingsafety it is indispensable that

the casings be positioned correctly with respect to the lifting equipment.

Positioningthe casing

Using the appropriate lifting equipment, position the chamber casing so that:

S The centreline of the chambers is perpendicular to the plane of the liftingequipment,

S The distance between the casing and the lifting equipment is greater thanthe total length of the column fitted to the chassis ”L” + 2 m.

NOTE: The cradle on the first chamber will be used in the column-chamber coupling for all three circuit breaker poles

Illustration

L + 2 m



Installation


L31- 7137/EN013/18


Preparing the breaking chambers

Removing the

chamber casing

Remove the side panels and cover from the case.

Rotatingthe chambers

Using two flexible slings, swing the chambers through 180° then level thetransport covers.

NOTE: Turn the breaking chamber casing (2) so that the facewith the two ’humps’ is facing the lifting equipment.

2



Installation


L31- 7137/EN014/18


Preparing the column’s corona shield

Elements required:

ALSTOM Grid

List of ALSTOM Grid elements required for assembly (per pole):

Mark Illustration Description Quantity

(50) Corona shields 1

(51) Lugs 4

(52)

Fittings

H M10-30 4

Assembly Attach the lugs (51) to the corona shield (50) using the fittings (52) withoutovertightening.

50

51

52

x 4H M10- 30

Positioning Temporarily position the corona shield (50) and lugs (51) on the casing (2).

5051

2



Installation


L31- 7137/EN015/18


Preparing the elements required for the coupling operation

Elements required:

ALSTOM Grid

List of ALSTOM Grid items necessary for the operation:


(20) Seal 1

(21)

ScrewsH M16- 65 (19 mm)H M16- 75 (30 mm)

8

(22) Washer

M16 16

(23) Nut 8

(24) Coupling pin 1

(25) Circlips 1




Installation


L31- 7137/EN016/18


Preparing the elements required for the coupling operation (continued)

Tools required

ALSTOM Grid

List of ALSTOM Grid tools necessary for the operation:


(30)(31)

”Short” centring pin”Long” centring pin

1

(32) Lever 1

(33) Protective mask 1

(34) Trolley stop 1

(35) Fitting tool for

coupling pin 1

(36) (80 cm)

Rigid electrical wiring cable 1

(37) Circlip clamp

(not supplied). 1

Products required S MOLYKOTE M111 Grease: greasing contact surfaces

S LOCTITE 225: locking fitting in place

S MOBILPLEX 47 - MOBILUX EP3: greasing fittings



Installation


L31- 7137/EN017/18


Hoisting and preparing the column

Tools required List of tools required:


(45) Hoisting strap

(3 m) 4

Instructions The following table shows the steps to follow when lifting the column:

Step Action Illustration

1 Fit the lifting straps (45) totheends of the chassis feet 45

x 4

2 Lift the column

3 Hold the column suspendedto give access to its lower

end.



Installation


L31- 7137/EN018/18


Final coupling

Orientation of

column

Rotate the column (1) so that the control mount (3) is the same side as the

two ’humps’ on the breaking chamber casing (2).

3

1

2

Assemblingthe centring pins

Fit parts A, B & C to the centring pins (30) & (31) without locking them in placeso that they may be easily removed later on.

NOTE: Pin (31) is longer than pin (30).

30

A

B

C31

Depressurizingthe chambers

S Remove the cap (5) from the transport cover (4) and operate the valve (6)to re- establish atmospheric pressure within the chambers.REMINDER: transport pressure nitrogen: azote (N2) at 0.03 MPa at 20°C(101.3 kPa).

S Refit the cap (5).

56

4




Installation


L31- 7137/EN019/18


Final coupling, continued

Removing the

chamber transportcover

The table below shows the steps for removing the chamber transport cover:


1 Remove the fixings (40) andinsert the lever (32) throughthe bracket rings (7).Pull on the lever (32) to openthe cover (4).Hold on two two of the coverbolts (40) for later use.

32

x 8

H M16- 55

40 7

4

2 Start timing.(The final chamber/columncoupling operations shouldbe completed within

40 min).

3 Pull off the cover (4) to freethe stop ring (8) and ’rilsan’collar (9).

8

4

9

4 Fit the protective cover (33).

33




Installation


L31- 7137/EN0110/18



Removing the




5 Using wire cutters, cutthrough the ’Rilsan’ collar (9)holding the connector tubeand remove it.

9

6 Using the coupling tool (35),remove thetube (10) and sep-arate the cover (4) from thestop ring (8).

10 35

4

8

7 Fit the trolley stop (34) and fixin place using the bolts (40)recovered from the transportcover, hand tightening them.

x 2

H M16- 55

34

40

8 Prepare the fitting tool (35)by screwing the coupling pin(24) onto its end, hand tight-ening.

3524




Installation


L31- 7137/EN0111/18



Fitting the

centring pins

Fit the centring pins (30) & (31) hard against the spherical casing (2), lightly

tighten the nuts (41).Fit the screws (42) to the centring pins (30) and (31).

41

41

2

42

31

42

30

Removing thecolumn cover

The table below shows the steps for removing the column cover:


1 Remove the fittings (43) andopen the cover (11).

11

x 8

H M16- 55

43

2 Turn the cover (11) through90° to remove it.

11




Installation


L31- 7137/EN0112/18



Fitting the seal The table below shows the steps for fitting the seal:


1 Clean the contact surfaces”A” and ”B” with ISOPRO-PANOL.Only coat surface ”B” withMOLYKOTE M111 lubricant.

A

B

2 Fit a new seal (20) and placeit on surface ”A”, referring to”Preparing and fittingstatic seals”.

See module ’Generalassembly procedures’.

20

A

3 Temporarily fit a rigid cable(36) to counter the effects of the seal (20) coming apartduring the coupling process

20 36




Installation


L31- 7137/EN0113/18



Fitting the

coupling pin

The table below shows the steps for fitting the chamber- column coupling pin:


1 Slowly lower the column (1),inserting the centring pins(30) & (31) into the holes inthe flange.Make sure both pins are cor-rectly aligned.

1

12

30

8

31

2 Slower lower the column toalign the pin with the holes inthe cylinder (8) and the rod(12).

3 Insertthe fitting tool (35)withthe coupling pin (24) on itsend.

24

35

4 Slightly loosen the twoscrews holding the trolleystop (34) in place andremove it.

34




Installation


L31- 7137/EN0114/18



Fitting the

coupling pin



5 Fit the coupling pin (24) bymanually pulling on the fit-ting tool (34) until it stops onthe cylinder (8).

35

24

8

6 Fit the circlips (25), slidingthem along the fitting tool(35) using circlips pliers (37).See the second method (7).

25

35 37

7 Remove the fitting tool (35)from the coupling pin,loosening it by hand.Second method:Fit circlips (25) using circlippliers (37).

25

37

35




Installation


L31- 7137/EN0115/18



Connection

chambers/column




Remove the rigid cable (36).

Remove the trolley stop fix-ing screws (40).

B A

36 40

2 Lower the seal (20) onto thechamber casing.Lower the screws (42) onthe centring pins.

42

42

20

3 Continue to slowly lower thecolumn, removing the firsttwo sections of centring pin(30 & 31) when they are nolonger of any use as a guide,in the following order:- First section (C)

- Screw (42)- Second section (B)

NOTE: The aim of thisoperation is to preventthe centring pins com-ing into contact with theporcelain fins on thecolumn.

3031

(C)

(42)

(B)




Installation


L31- 7137/EN0116/18



Connection

chambers/column

The table below shows the steps for connecting the chambers to the column:


4 Slowly lower the column ontothe breaking chamber casing(2).Position the lugs (51) for thecorona shield (50) on the rimof the column then attachusing bolts (21), washers (22)and special nuts (23) - See’Locking Fixings’.See module ’Generalassembly procedures’.

Lock the nuts (23) at theappropriate torque, immobil-ising the bolt heads (21).

H M16- 65 (75)13,5 daN.m

x 621

22

23

51

x 4H M10- 303,2 daN.m

2

52

505 Tighten all fixings (52) to theirappropriate torque level.

6 End of coupling operation -stop the timer and note the

time taken.

7 Remove the last section (A)and the nut (41)fromthe cent-ring pins.Fix the last bolts (21), wash-ers (22) and special nuts (23)referring to ”Locking fix-ings”.See module ’Generalassembly procedures’.


H M16-65/75

13,5 daN.m

x 2

(A)

41

21

22

23

22




Installation


L31- 7137/EN0117/18



Vacuum extraction

and filling with gas

Once the coupling operation has been completed, continue with:

S The air extraction operation

S The gas filling operation



Installation


L31- 7137/EN0118/18





Installation

Tipping down the pole of the circuit--breaker

and vacuum operation

L31--721EN/031/4


Presentation

Introduction The column--chambers coupling is now finished -- the pole is yet maintained

by the lifting equipment. In order to continue the pole installation, it isnecessary now to lay it on the ground.


Topic Page

Tipping down the pole of the circuit--breaker 2

Vacuum operation 3

Protection of the interrupting chambers 4



Installation



L31--721EN/032/4



Process The table below gives the steps of tipping down the pole of the

circuit--breaker :

Step Action

1 Using the lifting device, slowly tip down the pole around the axisof the interrupting chambers until the ground.

Pay attention to do not damage the stress--shields ring (11).

2 Lay the supports of the frame on two wood boards (12).

3 Remove the flexible lifting straps (15).

4 Remove the ring bolts (13) and the thick washers (14).

11

12

x 4

13

14

15



Installation



L31--721EN/033/4


Vacuum operation

Principle The procedure of the vacuum operation depends on the duration of

chambers/column coupling.

Process See module :

-- “Connection the vacuum pump.-- “Vacuum operation”.



Installation



L31--721EN/034/4


Protection of the interrupting chambers

Introduction It is important to protect the insulators of the interrupting chambers during the

next operations (installing the terminals, installing the capacitors ...)

ProcessTo protect the interrupting chambers, use packaging protection, retained

from the opening of the column case.



Installation

Installing terminals

with preparation of contact surfaces

L31--733EN/031/4


Presentation

Diagram


Topic Page

Components, products and accessories 2

Preparing the contact surfaces 3

Installing terminals 4



Installation



L31--733EN/032/4


Components, products and accessories

Necessary

components

List of the ALSTOM Grid components necessary for the assembling (per

pole) :


(1) Terminal 2

(3) Screws

H M12--45 8

Necessary productsand accessories

List of the ALSTOM Grid products and accessories necessary for the instal-ling :

ALSTOM Gridreference

Diagram Designation

--01861262 Can of ISOPROPANOL (1l)

--01835106 Vaseline 204--9

--01835118 Contactal grease

--01831320 Abrasive paper A400

--02212337 Scotch Brite A--VF

--02212334 Rag

--02211842 Round brush No.4

--02211831 Brush No.16



Installation



L31--733EN/033/4


Preparing the contact surfaces

Preparing the

contact grease

The contact grease is a mixture composed of Vaseline and Contactal grease.

CONTACT GREASE = 50% Vaseline + 50% Contactal grease

Preparing thecontact surfaces

The table below gives the steps of preparing the contact surfaces :

Step Action Diagram

1Remove the temporary screwsfrom the terminal pads X1 and

X2.X1

X2

2 Dry rub with fine emery cloth.

3 Eliminate the dust produced.

4 Coat with CONTACT

GREASE.

5 Wipe with a clean rag, leaving just a thin layer of grease.

6 Rub over the grease with wa-terproof abrasive paper A400.



Installation



L31--733EN/034/4



Process Assembleimmediately the terminals (1) on the interruptingchambers (2) after

preparation of contact surfaces. Fasten the terminals using screws (3); useCONTACT GREASE to seal the screws.

x 4

H M12--455 daN.m

3

2

2

2

1

Comment D The electrical resistance value of the assembly should be :

R ≤ 2μΩ

D Before installing H.V. connectors, prepare the contact surfaces in thesame way.



Installation

Installing the capacitors

L31--748EN/011/4


Presentation

Diagram

Necessary tools List of the tools necessary :


(12) Lifting strap

(3 m) 2


Topic Page

Components and products 2

Preparing the capacitors 3

Installing the capacitors 4



Installation


L31--748EN/012/4


Components and products

Necessary

components


pole) :


(1) Capacitor 2

(3) Support 2

(4)or

Support(depending on the apparatus)

2

(5) Screws

H M12-30 8

(8) Screws

H M12-45 4

(9) Screws

H M12-25 4

(1) Spacer 4

Necessary products S MOBILPLEX 47 -- MOBILUX EP3 : screw greasing.



Installation


L31--748EN/013/4


Preparing the capacitors

Installing

the supportsS Install the support (3) on the capacitor (1) using the screws (5).

S Install the support (4) on the capacitor (1) using the screws (5).

4

3

x 2

H M12--305 daN.m

5

4

x 2

H M12--305 daN.m

5

1



Installation


L31--748EN/014/4



Process Install the capacitors (1) on the interrupting chambers (6) and (7) using the

screws (8) and (9).

NOTE : Use the two spacers (10) to install the capacitors -- capacitorsupport (4) side.

10

x 2

H M12--455 daN.m

8

4 10

4

x 2

H M12--255 daN.m

9

x 2

H M12--25

5 daN.m

9

1

1

6

7



Installation

Installing stress --shields on the interrupting chambers

L31--7509EN/011/4


Presentation

Diagram


Topic Page

Preparing the stress--shields 2

Installing the stress--shields 3



Installation


L31--7509EN/012/4


Preparing the stress--shields

Necessary

ALSTOM Gridcomponents


pole) :


(1) Stress--shields ring 2

(2) Bracket 8

(3) Screws

H M10-30 8

Necessary product MOBILPLEX 47 -- MOBILUX EP3 : screw greasing.

Assembling Install the brackets (2) on the stress--shields ring (1) using screws (3) do nottighten.

x 4H M10--30

3

2

1



Installation


L31--7509EN/013/4


Installing stress--shields

Necessary



pole) :


(5) Screws

H M12-30 8

Necessary product LOCTITE 262 (screws locking)

Process Install the stress--shields (1) at each end of the interrupting chambers (4)using the screws (5).

NOTE : Lock the screws (5) with “LOCTITE 262”.

1

4

1

x 4

H M12--305 daN.m

5

1

4



Installation


L31--7509EN/014/4





Installation

Lifting and positionning the pole

L31--7606EN/031/4


GRID

Presentation

Necessary tools List of the necessary ALSTOM Grid tools for the lifting and positionning of the

pole :


(1) LIFTING STRAP

(3 m -- 1000 kg) 4

(2) LIFTING STRAP

(6 m-- 1000 kg) 4


Topic Page

Positioning the lifting straps 2

Lifting the pole 3

Positioning the pole 4

Warning “Procedure limited to pole installation only. For removal, contact

ALSTOM.”“Any faults or cracks in the column may render the proceduredangerous.”



Installation


L31--7606EN/032/4


GRID

Positioning the lifting straps

Process The table below gives the steps of positioning the lifting straps :

Step Action

1 D For poles of circuit--breakers fitted with a column made up withthree insulators, four 6 m lifting straps are sufficient.

D For columns made up with four insulators, prepare four wholes :one 3 m lifting strap (1) knotted with one 6 m lifting strap (2).

2 Pass the lifting straps like the picture below.-- The lifting straps “a” pass over the housing (7).-- The lifting straps “b” pass under the housing (7).

3 Cross the lifting straps “a” and “b” and place them onto the frameusing the four lifting shackles (8).

2

1

7

a

b

3

8

8

a

b



Installation


L31--7606EN/033/4


GRID

Lifting the pole

Process By means of a lifting device hoist the pole up whilst allowing it to rest on the

base of the frame.Place the trip ropes (10) on the support legsof the chassis frame (9) to ensureguidance of the pole at the time of lifting.Lift the pole with precaution.

10

9



Installation


L31--7606EN/034/4


GRID

Positioning the pole

Process The table below gives the steps of positioning the pole :

Step Action

1 Use a lifting device to position the chassis frame onto its groundattachment points but do not secure it, whilst respecting theorientation of the pole indicated on the sketch of the device.

2 If necessary, place shims under the supports of the frame so thatthe upper plate is level.

3 Install the washers (12) and clamp the whole to the ground usingnut.

4 Remove the lifting straps.

5

18 daN.m

Check the tightening torques of all frame screws.

6 Tightenthefixingson the two floor seatings inaccordance with themodule entitled ’Tightening Torques’ and in accordance with thediameters of the anchoring points.

12



Installation

Installation of operating device

L31--7902EN/011/12

06--2011 A L S T OM 2 0 1 0 . A l l r i g h ts r e s e r v e d . I n f o r ma t i o n c o n t a i n e d i n t h i s d o c u m e n t i s i n d i c a ti v e o n l y . N o r e p re s e n t a t i o n o r w a r ra n t y i s g i v e n o r s h o u l d b e r e l i e do n t h a t i t i s c o m p l e t e o r c o r r e c t o r w i l l a p p l y t o a n y p a r t i c u l a r p r o j e c t . T h i s w i l l d e p e n d o n t h e t e c h n i c a l a n d c o m m e r c i a l c i r c u m s t a n c e s . I t i s p r o v i d e dw i t h o u t l i a b i l i t y a n d i s s u b j e c t t o c h a n g e w i t h o u t n o t i c e . R e p r o d u c t i o n , u s e o r d i s c l o s u r e t o t h i r d p a r t i e s , w i t h o u t e x p r e s s w r i t t e n a u t h o r i t y , i s s t r i c t l yp ro h i b i t e d . GRID

Presentation

Necessary product G r e as e MO B I L PL E X 4 7 or M O BI L U X E P 3 ( s c re w s g r e as i n g)

NecessaryALSTOM Gridtools

L i st o f t h e A L S TO M G r id t o ol s n ec es sa ry f o r t h e i ns t al li ng :

Mark Diagram Designat ion Number

(1) Lif t ing st rap 1

(6) Lever 1

Lifting equipment P r o vi d e a n a p pr o p ri a t e l i f t in g e q ui p m en t (3 0 0 d a N) .

Process T h e t a b le b e lo w g i ve s t h e s t e ps o f i n s ta l l in g t h e o p er a t i ng d e vi c e o n t h epole--support :

St ep Topic Page

A P reparing the operating device 2

B Preparing t he pole operat ing shaf t 3C Coupling t he operat ing device 6

D Fast ening the operating device 8

ER e mo v in g t h e b l oc k i ng t o o l

10

F Low volt age elect rical wiring 11

G Permanent heat ing syst em 12



Installation


L31--7902EN/012/12


Preparing the operating device

Unpacking R e mo v e p a ck a gi n g p r o te c t i on a n d c h ec k t h a t o p er a t in g d e vi c e a n d p o le

r e f er e nc e n u mb e r s a r e t h e r i gh t o n es .

Optical signalizations C h ec k t h e p o si t i on o f o p e r a t in g d e v i ce o p t ic a l s i g na l iz a t i on :

Circuit--breakerOpen

Closing spring

Released

Necessarycomponents

L i s t o f t h e A L S TO M G r i d c o m po n en t s n e c e ss a ry f o r t h e o p er a t io n :


(11) Seal 1

(22) Spacer 4

Installing thenecessarycomponents

-- I n s t al l t h e s p a c er s ( 2 2 ) o n t h e s c re w s ( 9 ) o u t si d e t h e o p er a t in g d e v i c e.

-- I n s t al l t h e s e al ( 11 ) o n t h e o p e r at i n g s h a f t ( 1 3 ) .

-- C h ec k t h e p r es e n ce o f g r ea s e ( A S E OL 0 -- 3 6 5 . 2) o n t h e o p er a t in g s h a f t

(13).

13

x 49

22

11



Installation


L31--7902EN/013/12


Preparing the pole operating shaft

Introduction F o r t r an sp or t th e p ol e i s f i t te d w it h a s ec ur i ng to ol ( 4) an d a sa f et y pl a te (5 ),

t e m p o r a r i l y a t t a c h e d t o t h e e n d o f t h e h a n d l e ( 1 2 )To f i t t h e o p er a t in g l e ve r, y o u m u s t :a -- R e mo v e t h e s e cu r in g t o o l ( 4 ) .b -- Manually open the pole.c -- R e f i t t h e s e cu r in g t o o l ( 4 ) ( “ o pe n ” p o si t i o n).d -- R e mo v e t h e s a f et y p l at e ( 5 ).

4

5

12

5

7

Grease C he ck t h e p re se nc e o f g re a se ( A SE O L 0 -- 3 6 5. 2 ) o n t h e p ol e o pe ra t in g s h af t .




Installation


L31--7902EN/014/12


Preparing the pole operating shaft, c o n t in u e d

“Manual opening”

operation

T h e t a b l e b e l ow g i ve s t h e s t e ps o f “ m a n u al o p en i ng ” o p e r at i o n :

St ep Act ion Diagram

1 Remove t he securing t ool( 4 ) t h en s cr e w t h e o pe ra t in gl ev er ( 6 ) o n t o t h e f l a n ge o nt he f ront of t he handlesleeve (12).

12

4

6

2 W it h t he help of t he lever ( 6),e ff ec t a 6 0° r ot a ti on o f t h esleeve (12).

6

12



Installation


L31--7902EN/015/12




operation, continued



3 Put b ack t he b locking t ool(4) on t he f lange of t hesleeve (12).

NOTE : T hi s t ool ensuret h e a ng ul ar p os it i on in g o f pole operat ing shaf td ur ing t he c oup li ng w it ht h e o p er a t in g m e ch a ni s m .

6

412

4

M10

4 Remove t he l ev er (6).

5 R em ov e t he s af et y p lat e ( 5)and t he s crews f rom t hef lange on t he f ront of t hehandle sleeve (12).

12

58



Installation


L31--7902EN/016/12


Coupling the operating device

Necessary

components



(10) Washer

M20 4

(22) Spacer 1

(26) Spacer 1

(23) Eccent ric spacer 2

(14) NutH M20 4

(24) Wedge (t hickness 1 mm) 1

(25) Wedge (thickness 0,5 mm) 2




Installation


L31--7902EN/017/12


Coupling the operating device, c o n t i n u e d

Coupling T h e t a bl e b el ow g iv es t h e s t ep s o f t h e o pe r at i ng d ev ic e c ou pl in g :

St ep Act ion

1 S li n g th e op er at i ng d e vi ce u s in g a l if t i ng s t ra p ( 1) l i ke d i ag r am .

NOTE : D o n ot r em ov e t he r oo f ( 17) o f t he o pe ra ti ng d ev ic eb e f or e s l i ng i ng .

2 L if t t he o pe ra ti ng d ev ic e an d ma ke t hi s le ve l. A pproximate weight 300 kg.

3 A pp ro ac h t he o pe ra ti ng d ev ic e i n a ss em bl y p os it io n, t he j ib o f t he l if t -i n g e q u i pm e n t m u s t b e u n de r t h e s t r es s -- s h i e ld s r i ng ( t o a v oi d t h a tthe cables touch the stress--shields ring).

The final approach must be done with extreme caution.

4 I n t ro du ce t h e o pe r at i ng m e ch an is m s ha f t ( 13 ) i nt o t h e c yl i nd er ( 1 2)o f t h e p o l e o p er a t in g s h af t .

5 A s so on a s th e lo we r fa st en in g sc re w (9 ) “A” e m e r g e f r o m t h e h o l eo f t h e o pe ra t in g m e ch an i sm s up po r t ( 8) , i ns t al l t h e s pa ce r ( 26 ) ,w a s h e r ( 1 0 ) a n d t h e n u t ( 1 4 ) .

NOTE : Do not t ight en t he nut ( 14) .

17

12

13

8

”A”

8

1

14

9

10

26



Installation


L31--7902EN/018/12


Fastening the operating device

Installing

the fastening nuts

T h e t a b le b e lo w g i ve s t h e s t e ps o f i n s ta l l in g t h e o p er a t i ng d e vi c e f a s t e n i ng

n ut s :

St ep Act ion

1 I ns ta ll t he s pa ce r ( 22 ), wa sh er ( 10) a nd t he n ut ( 14 ) o n t h e l ow erf a s t e n i n g s c r e w “B”.


2 I n st a ll t h e ec ce nt r ic s pa ce rs ( 2 3) , w as he rs ( 1 0) a n d th e nu t s ( 14 ) o nt h e u p pe r f a s t en i ng s c r ew s “C” a n d “D”.

NOTE : Do not t ight en t he nut s ( 14).

3 R ot at e t he e c ce nt ri c s pa ce rs ( 2 3) t o d o t h e c on ta ct w i th t h e l ow eredge of the pole--support oblong holes.

4 T ig ht e n -- t e mp or a ri l y a t t h e i nd ic at e d t i gh t en in g t o rq ue -- t h e f as t en -i n g s c r ew s ( 9 ) .

22 x 1

23

10

14

x 2

10

14

23

5 daN.m

9

”B”

”C”

”D”




Installation


L31--7902EN/019/12


Fastening the operating device, c o n t in u e d

Wedging

and tightening

T he t ab le b el ow g iv es t he w ed gi ng p ro ce du re f or t he f as te ni ng s cr ew s

d ep en di ng t o t h e X p l a y :

X

22

20Important

35 daN.m

2425

If the X play is ... Action

X <1 mm Tighten to the indicated tightening

torque.

X ≥1 mm

D W ed ge b et w ee n t h e s pa ce r ( 2 2)a nd t h e o pe ra t in g d ev ic e ( 2 0) w it h t h eprovided wedges (24)--(25).

D Tighten the screw to theindicated tightening torque.

Lifting strap R e mo v e t h e l i f t i ng s t r a p.



Installation


L31--7902EN/0110/12


Removing the blocking tool

Process REMOVE THE BLOCKING TOOL (4).

4



Installation


L31--7902EN/0111/12


Low voltage electrical wiring

Process C on ne ct u p t h e o pe ra t in g d ev i ce ’s w ir es r e fe r t o t h e w ir i ng d ia gr a m o f t h e c i r-

cuit--breaker.C o nn e ct u p t h e o p er a t i ng d e vi c e’ s w i re s .

NOTE : Use t he holes pr ovided on t he support s of t he f rame t o f ixt h e c a bl es .

Connecting up thecontact densimetercable

C o n n e c t t h e w i r e s f r o m t h e e l e c t r i c a l c o n t a c t S F 6 d e ns i m et e r ( 1 8) c a bl e ( 1 9 )t o t h e o p er a t in g m e ch a ni s m t e r m i n al b l oc k , i n a c co r d an c e w i t h t h e r e la t i v ediagram.

18

19



Installation


L31--7902EN/0112/12


Permanent heating system

Process S wi t ch o n t h e p e r ma ne nt h ea t in g s ys t em o f t h e o p e ra t in g d ev ic e ( i n b o t h s u m -

m e r a n d w i n t e r ) t o a v o i d c o n d e n s a t i o n , a n d t h e c o r r o s i o n w h i c h m i g h t r e s u l tf r o m t h i s.

D O N O T S U PP LY T H E O P E R AT I N G M E CH A NI S M M O T OR W I T H C U R-R E NT T O AV O I D T H E C L OS I N G S P RI N G B E I NG R E LO A D ED .THE CIRCUIT BREAKER MUST NOT BE OPERATED AT A SF6 PRES-SURE GAS LOWER THAN THE MINIMAL PRESSURE FOR THE INSULA-TION pme.



Installation

Connection the vacuum pump

L31--853EN/031/4


Presentation

Necessary

ALSTOM Grid tools

List of the ALSTOM Grid tools necessary for the installing :


(1)

VACUUM PUMP(OPTIONAL)

110/220 V 50 Hz (4.5 m3 /h)or

115/230 V 60 Hz (4.5 m3 /h)

1

(2) UNIVERSAL CONNECTION

1/2” GAZ ET 1/2” NPT 1


Topic Page

Installing the universal connection 2

Connection the tube of the customer supply vacuum pump 3

Connection the ALSTOM Grid supply vacuum pump 4



Installation


L31--853EN/032/4


Installing the universal connection

Process The table below gives the steps of installing the universal connection :

Step Action Diagram

1 Remove the plug (3).

3

2 Install the universalconnection (2)) (handtightening of nut issufficient).

2



Installation


L31--853EN/033/4


Connection the tube of the customer supply vacuum pump

Operation on the

vacuum pump

Close the tap of the vacuum pump.

Universal connectioncomponents

List of the universal connection components :


(5) “DILO” union 1

(6) 1/2” GAS union 1

(7)

1/2” NPT union

NOTE : Minimum insidediameter of the tube to useØ 16.25mm.

1

(8) Collar 1

Connection The table below gives the connection procedure of the vacuum depending of the used tube union :

2

If the tube is equippedwith an union ...

Action

DILODILO

Remove the universal connection (2) andconnect directly the tube.

1/2” GASRemove the parts (6) -- (7) of the universalconnection (2) and connect the tube ontothe part (5).

1/2” NPTRemove the part (7) of the universalconnection (2) and connect the tube ontothe part (6).

No union(to avoid, not very reliable)

Connect the tube directly onto the part (7)of the universal connection (2) using collar(8).



Installation


L31--853EN/034/4


Connection the ALSTOM Grid supply vacuum pump

Vacuum pump

equipment

The table below describes the accessory (9) main components of the

vacuum pump (1) :

13

1

SUCKING BACK DN25

SUCKING UPPNEUROP DN25

14

CLOSED

9

10

12

11

Mark Component Information

(10) Tap Opening -- Closing of the vacuum

pump.

(11) Pressure gauge Reading the pressure.

(12) Distribution block Connection the vacuum pump.

(13) Close tap Fastening the accessory (9).

Process The table below gives the steps of the vacuum pump connection :

Step Action Comment

1 Install the accessory (9) on the“SUCKING UP” exit of thevacuumpump (1).

Use the close tap (13).

2 Close the tap (10).

3 Connect one end of the tube (14)to the distribution block (12).

The tube (14) is not providedby ALSTOM Grid.

4 Connect the other end of the tube

(14) to the SF6 checking block.

Refer to “Connection the

tube of the customer supplyvacuum pump



Installation

Installing and commissioning

the synchronous device RPH2

L31--871EN/021/6


GRID

Presentation

Introduction The synchronous device RPH2 is delivered with the C.B. and is to be installed

in the relay room. Delivering the RPH2 with a C.B. includes :

D The RPH2 itself,

D The programming and the testing of the RPH2 device in association withthe C.B., in accordance with the programming document and the checkingdocument delivered with the C.B.,

D If necessary, a temperature sensor is supplied (in accordance with theprogramming document).

The RPH2 installation in the relay room to be made by people in charge of installing the protection and control equipment in the substation.The RPH2 installation instructions to people in charge of installing theprotection and control equipment in the substation are detailed below.


Topic Page

Installing the RPH2 2

Installation at site of the RPH2 associated with a C.B. 3

Programming document and checking document deliveredwith the C.B.

4

Adding a RPH2 device on an existing C.B. 5

Replacing a RPH2 device 6



Installation



L31--871EN/022/6


GRID

Installing the RPH2

Installing the RPH2

device in the relayroom

The RPH2 device must be installed in the relay room. Cables must be wired :

D between the circuit breaker and the RPH2 device,

D between the High Voltage Transformer (and Current Transformer if applicable) and the RPH2 device.

Installing the ambienttemperature sensor(option)

In some application, a temperature sensor to measure the ambienttemperature is needed to be connected to the RPH2 device, and to correctthe variation of the C.B. operating times.When this temperature sensor is needed, it is delivered with the RPH2 device.This temperature sensor must be fitted at site, near the relay room, tomeasure the site ambient temperature.Thetemperature sensor must be connectedto the RPH2 device using a cable

(twisted pair).

Correspondencebetween C.B. polesand the networkphases and the phasemeasuring thereference voltage

The reference voltage is to be measured upstream the C.B. to synchronize.

The synchronous device RPH2 delivers operating impulses to each circuitbreaker pole, taking into consideration the voltage phase angle of thenetwork.Consequently, to obtain the correct synchronization of the circuit breakeroperation, it is necessary to respect the order of the C.B. pole 1, 2 and 3 inaccordance with the direct order of the network phases.

In addition the correct operation of the synchronous device RPH2 needs thatthe reference voltage is measured respecting the previous phase in the C.B.low voltage diagram.

See the module “Correspondence between C.B. poles and the networkphases and the phase measuring the reference voltage”.

Correspondencebetween the RPH2,the C.B., and theprevious application

Each synchronous device RPH2 is programmed in association with aparticular C.B., and for a previous application.

When the correspondence RPH2 / C.B. must be changed, or when installinga spare part RPH2, a new programming of the RPH2 device is necessary inaccordance with the programming document delivered with the C.B.

In addition, when the application (type of operation, type of charge) ischanged and is different of the programming document delivered with theC.B., contact the after-sale service to change the programming document

and eventually the C.B. low voltage diagram.



Installation



L31--871EN/023/6


GRID

Installation at site of the RPH2 associated with a C.B.

Process The RPH2 device is programmed in factory and tested with the associated

C.B. during the factory tests.

After installing the RPH2 , people in charge of installing the protection andcontrol equipment in the substation commission the RPH2 with theassociated C.B. They can check the correct operation of the assembly RPH2+ C.B. using a time recorder tool (type Hathaway CTB400) and referring withthe programming document and the checking document delivered with theC.B.



Installation



L31--871EN/024/6


GRID

Programming document and checking document delivered with the C.B.

Introduction The RPH2 device is delivered with the C.B., and programmed and check

with its associated C.B.

Programmingdocument

Programming the RPH2 consists to enter in the RPH2 internal memory all theparameters in relation with the application and also with the type of theassociated C.B. (see the RPH2 service manual 58.020.034). All theseparameters are noted on the document called “Programming document”

delivered with the C.B.

Checking document Once programmed, the RPH2 is factory checked with the associated C.B. totest the correct operation of this assembly. This checking tests that thesequence of operating times is in accordance with the previous application.The sequence of these operating times is written in a document called

“Checking document” delivered with the C.B.



Installation



L31--871EN/025/6


GRID

Adding a RPH2 device on an existing C.B.

Process Contact the after--sale service in order to check if the C.B. is capable of

synchronous operation.

Also using the RPH2 device needs to modify the C.B. low voltage diagram :

D The operation impulses needs to cross the RPH2 device,

D Depending on option and application, some information delivered by theC.B. needs to be wired to the RPH2 device.



Installation



L31--871EN/026/6


GRID

Replacing a RPH2 device

Type of RPH2 The RPH2 device must be the same type of the replaced one.

Programming The RPH2 device must be programmed in accordance with the programmingdocument associated with the C.B. (see the RPH2 service manual58.020.034). All these parameters are noted on the document called“Programming document” delivered with the C.B.

Checking Check tests that the sequence of operating times is in accordance with theprevious application. The sequence of these operating times is written in a

document called “Checking document” delivered with the C.B.



Installation

RPH2--Assignment of the circuit breaker poles to the

network phases and reference voltage measurement

phase

L31--872EN/021/6


GRID

Presentation

Introduction The electrical diagram supplied with the circuit breaker illustrates the

connections between the RPH2 and the circuit breaker poles, making theassumption that :

-- The reference voltage is measured on phase 1.

-- Circuit breaker pole 1 is installed on phase 1 of the network.

-- Circuit breaker pole 2 is installed on phase 2 of the network (phase lag of 120° relative to phase 1 of the network).

-- Circuit breaker pole 3 is installed on phase 3 of the network (phase lag of 240° relative to phase 1 of the network).

If these conditions cannot be respected, it is necessary to change overthe wiring between the RPH2 and the circuit breaker and theparameter--setting of the times in the RPH2, as per the table below :

Case to treat Action Page

In all cases

Changeover of the impulse circuitscorresponding to channel 1 of theRPH2

2Changeover of the operating timesand offset times of the auxiliaryswitches programmed in theRPH2 for channel 1

If the RPH2 synchronizesboth at opening and at

closing

Changeover of the impulse circuitscorresponding to channel 2 of theRPH2

3Changeover of the operating timesand lag times of the auxiliaryswitches programmed in theRPH2 for channel 2

If the circuit breakerauxiliary switches are

connected to RPH2

Changeover of the connections of the auxiliary switches 4

If the RPH2 measures themain current

Changeover of the currentmeasurement circuits

5



Installation



phase

L31--872EN/022/6


GRID

In all cases

Changeover of the

impulse circuitscorresponding tochannel 1 of theRPH2

Change over terminals X8 :3, X8 :4 and X8 :5 in order to have :

D X8 :3 linked to the impulse circuit of the circuit breaker pole correspondingto the same phase as the phase on which the reference voltage is measured.D X8 :4 linked to the impulse circuit of the circuit breaker pole correspondingto the phase with the 120° lag relative to the phase on which the referencevoltage is measured.D X8 :5 linked to the impulse circuit of the circuit breaker pole correspondingto the phase with the 240° lag relative to the phase on which the referencevoltage is measured.The table below gives the changeover of the impulse circuitscorresponding to channel 1 :

Reference phase Phase with 120° lagin relation to thereference phase

Phase with 240° lagin relation to thereference phase

From RPH2 terminal X8 :3 RPH2 terminal X8 :4 RPH2 terminal X8 :5

To Impulse circuit of thepole corresponding tothe reference phase

Impulse circuit of thepole corresponding tothe phase with a 120°

lag relative to thereference phase



Changeover of theoperating times andoffset times of theauxiliary switches

programmed in theRPH2 for channel 1

Change over in the RPH2 the programming of the operating times and offsettimes of the channel 1 auxiliary switches :D Modify the operating time and aux. offset time programmed in the RPH2for phase L1 in order to have the times of the circuit breaker polecorresponding to the same phase as the phase on which the referencevoltage is measured.D Modify the operating time and aux. offset time programmed in the RPH2for phase L2 in order to have the times of the circuit breaker polecorresponding to the phase with the 120° lag relative to the phase on whichthe reference voltage is measured (caution: do not change over the flash andpre--flash times)D Modify the operating time and aux. offset time programmed in the RPH2for phase L3 in order to have the times of the circuit breaker polecorresponding to the phase with the 240° lag relative to the phase on whichthe reference voltage is measured (caution: do not change over the flash andpre--flash times)The table below gives the changeover of the operating times and offset

times of the auxiliary switches programmed in the RPH2 for channel 1 :Reference phase Phase with 120° lag

in relation to thereference phase


RPH2 item Phase L1 Phase L2 Phase L3

Data to beinput

Time of polecorresponding tothe referencephase

Time of the phasecorresponding to thephase with 120° lagrelative to thereference phase

Time of polecorresponding to thephase with 240° lagrelative to thereference phase

Caution : do not change over the flash and pre--flash times.



Installation



phase

L31--872EN/023/6


GRID

If the RPH2 synchronizes both at opening and at closing

Type of RPH2 Calls for an RPH2 of type RPH2--2xx

Changeover of theimpulse circuitscorresponding tochannel 2 of theRPH2

Change over terminals X8 :8, X8 :9 and X8 :10 in order to have :D X8 :8 linked to the impulse circuit of the circuit breaker polecorresponding to the same phase as the phase on which the referencevoltage is measured.D X8 :9 linked to the impulse circuit of the circuit breaker polecorresponding to the phase with the 120° lag relative to the phase onwhich the reference voltage is measured.D X8 :10 linked to the impulse circuit of the circuit breaker polecorresponding to the phase with the 240° lag relative to the phase onwhich the reference voltage is measured.The table below gives the changeover of the impulse circuits

corresponding to channel 2 :Reference phase Phase with 120° lag

in relation to thereference phase



To Impulse circuit of thepole corresponding tothe reference phase





Changeover of the

operating times andoffset times of theauxiliary switchesprogrammed in theRPH2 for channel 2 :

Change over in the RPH2 the programming of the operating times and offset

times of the channel 2 auxiliary switches :D Modify the operating time and aux. offset time programmed in the RPH2for phase L1 in order to have the times of the circuit breaker polecorresponding to the same phase as the phase on which the referencevoltage is measured.D Modify the operating time and aux. offset time programmed in the RPH2for phase L2 in order to have the times of the circuit breaker polecorresponding to the phase with the 120° lag relative to the phase on whichthe reference voltage is measured.D Modify the operating time and aux. offset time programmed in the RPH2for phase L3 in order to have the times of the circuit breaker polecorresponding to the phase with the 240° lag relative to the phase on whichthe reference voltage is measured.

The table below gives the changeover of the operating times and offsettimes of the auxiliary switches programmed in the RPH2 for channel 2 :



RPH2item

Phase L1 Phase L2 Phase L3

Data tobe

inputDatos a

entrar

Time of polecorresponding tothe referencephase

Time of the phasecorresponding to thephase with 120° lagrelative to thereference phase

Time of polecorresponding to thephase with 240° lagrelative to thereference phase

Caution : do not change over the flash and pre--flash times.



Installation



phase

L31--872EN/024/6


GRID

If the circuit breaker auxiliary switches are connected to RPH2

Type of RPH2 Calls for an RPH2 with option S.

Changeover of theconnections of theauxiliary switches

Change over terminals X8 :13, X8 :14 and X8 :15 in order to have :

D X8 :13 linked to the auxiliary switch of the circuit breaker polecorresponding to the same phase as the phase on which the referencevoltage is measured.

D X8 :14 linked to the auxiliary switch of the circuit breaker polecorresponding to the phase with the 120° lag relative to the phase on whichthe reference voltage is measured.

D X8 :15 linked to the auxiliary switch of the circuit breaker polecorresponding to the phase with the 240° lag relative to the phase on whichthe reference voltage is measured.

The table below gives the changeover of the connections of theauxiliary switches :




To Auxiliary switch of thepole corresponding tothe reference phase

Auxiliary switch of thepole corresponding tothe phase with a 120°


Auxiliary switch of thepole corresponding tothe phase with a 240°




Installation



phase

L31--872EN/025/6


GRID

If the RPH2 measures the main current

Type of RPH2 Calls for an RPH2 with option I.

Changeover of thecurrent measurementcircuits

Change over the terminals of terminal block X9 in order to have :

D X9 :1 and X9 :2 (or X9 :3) linked to the current measurement circuitcorresponding to the same phase as the phase on which the referencevoltage is measured.

D X9 :4 and X9 :5 (or X9 :6) linked to the current measurement circuitcorresponding to the phase with the 120° lag relative to the reference phase.

D X9 :7 and X9 :8 (or X9 :9) linked to the current measurement circuitcorresponding to the phase with the 240° lag relative to the phase on whichthe reference voltage is measured.

The table below gives the changeover of the current measurementcircuits :



From RPH2 terminalsX9 :1 and X9 :2

(or X9 :3)

RPH2 terminalsX9 :4 and X9 :5

(or X9 :6)

RPH2 terminalsX9 :7 and X9 :8

(or X9 :9)

To Currentmeasurement circuitcorresponding to thereference phase

Currentmeasurement circuitcorresponding to thephase with a 120° lag

relative to thereference phase

Currentmeasurement circuitcorresponding to thephase with a 240° lag

relative to thereference phase



Installation



phase

L31--872EN/026/6


GRID




Installation

Vacuum operation

L31--881EN031/6


Presentation

Principle The procedure of the vacuum operation depends on the duration of

chambers/column coupling.

Decision table The table below gives the vacuum operation procedure depending on theduration of chambers/column coupling :

If the duration of thechambers/column coupling is ...

Action Page

≤ 40 min Simple vacuum operation 2

> 40 min Vacuum operation with

nitrogen purging (N2) 3



Installation

Vacuum operation

L31--881EN032/6


Simple vacuum operation

Process The table below gives the steps of the simple vacuum operation :

Step Action Comment/Diagram

1 Start the vacuum pump toevacuate the pole to a value≤ 1 mbar (100 Pa).

KEEP THE PUMP RUNNINGFOR AT LEAST 1 HOUR ATTHIS VALUE.

2 Close the tap (1) of the vacuumpump.

Open

Closed1

3 Stop the vacuum pump.

4 Disconnect the vacuum pumptube (2).

2

5 Fit the filling tool (4) -- HANDTIGHT.

4

END OF PROCEDURE



Installation

Vacuum operation

L31--881EN033/6


Vacuum operation with nitrogen purging (N2 )

Preparing the

nitrogen bottle (N2 )

The table below gives the steps of preparing the nitrogen bottle (N2) :

Step Action Diagram

1 Remove the cover (6) and plug (7)from the nitrogen (N2) bottle (8). 7

6

8

N2

2 Fit the pressure reducer (10) onthe nitrogen (N2) bottle (8). 8

10N2

3 Briefly open the nitrogen (N2)bottle tap (9) and the cock (11) of the pressure reducer to eliminateany air inside the piping (approx.20 s at low flow--rate).

9 Open

ClosedN2 11

4 Close the bottle tap (9) and the

cock (11) of the pressure reducer.NOTE : Keep the end of thetube (12) in high position tokeep the nitrogen (N2) which itcontains and to prevent dampair from entering.

9 12

Closed11N2

END OF PROCEDURE




Installation

Vacuum operation

L31--881EN034/6


Vacuum operation with nitrogen purging (N2 ), continued

Vacuum operation Thetablebelow gives the steps of thevacuum operation with nitrogen purging

(N2) :


1 Carry out a simple vacuumoperation.

≤ 1 mbar (100 Pa)during 1 hour.

2 Remove the valve cap (5) of thefilling tool (4).

5

4

3 S Open the nitrogen (N2) bottletap (9).

S Open and close the cock (11)of the pressure reducer toeliminate any air inside the tube(12) (approx. 3 s at lowflow--rate).

S Close the nitrogen (N2) bottletap (9).

9 12

N2Closed11

Open

4 Connectthe tube (12) tothefillingtool (4).

4

12

5 Open the nitrogen (N2) bottle tap

(9) and adjust gas output byacting on the cock (11) of thepressure reducer (reduced flowrate).

S Close the tap (9) from time totime to check pressure on thegauge (13).

S Start filling again until therequired pressure about0.03 MPa is reached.

S Close in this order : the tap (9),then the cock (11).

9

13

Open

N2Closed11




Installation

Vacuum operation

L31--881EN035/6


Vacuum operation with nitrogen purging (N2 ), continued

Vacuum operation,

continued

The table below gives the continuation of the steps of the vacuum operation

with nitrogen purging (N2) :


6 Disconnect the tube (12) from thefilling tool (4).

12

4

7 Remove the filling tool (4) withthe valve cap.

4

8 Connect the vacuum pump andopen the tap (1) to bring thevolume of pole back to ambientpressure (filled with nitrogen at0.03 MPa).

Open

Closed1

9 Carry out a new simplevacuum operation.

≤ 1 mbar (100 Pa)during 1 hour.

END OF PROCEDURE



Installation

Vacuum operation

L31--881EN036/6





Installation

Calculation of the SF6 gas filling pressure

for using the pressure gauge (tool)

L31--924EN/021/4


GRID

Presentation

Introduction SF6 pressure values, for the filling, must obligatorily be read on the pressure

gauge 0--1 MPa (tooling). Pay no attention to indications given by the dialdensimeter (MPa -- psi), it is not accurate enough for the filling.

Pressure gauge 0...1 MPa

Pressure units(reminder)

D The international unit pressure is the Pascal (Pa).

1 bar (14.503 psi) = 1,000 hPa1 bar = 100 kPa10 bar = 1 MPa

Symbols IEC symbols for the apparatus technical characteristics.

Symbol Designation

pre Filling rated pressure for the insulation

pae Alarm pressure for the insulation

pme Minimal pressure for the insulation


Topic Page

Example of the filling pressure calculation 2

Calculation of the filling pressure at site 3

Values of the SF6 gas pressures in accordancewith the temperature

4



Installation



L31--924EN/022/4


GRID

SF6 gas The table below gives the SF6 gas characteristics :

Absolute pressure at 20°C(68°F)

pre Filling absolute pressure for the insula-tion

1,00 MPa(145.04 p.s.i.)

i.e. effective pressureat 20°C(68°F) and 101.3 kPa

preFilling rated effective pressurefor the insulation

+ 0.01-- 0

0,9 MPa(130.53 p.s.i.)

pae Alarm effective pressure for theinsulation

+ 0.02-- 0

0,76 MPa ( pme+0,03 MPa)(110.23 p.s.i.)

pmeMinimal effective pressure forthe insulation

+ 0.02-- 0

0,73 MPa(105.88 p.s.i.)

SF6 gas density

pre 68,7 kg/m3

pae 57,8 kg/m3

pme 55,5 kg/m3

Minimum admissible temperatureup to

--20°C

Example Determination of the circuit--breaker’s filling pressure with SF6 gas.

Parameters Values

pre

SF6 gas rated filling effective

pressure for the insulation

0,9 MPa(130.53 psi)

Ambient temperature 5°C

Local atmospheric pressure 93,2 kPa

SF6 gas filling The table below gives the calculation steps of the pure SF6 filling pressure :

Step Action Result

1 In the chart (page 4) “Values of theSF6 gas effective pressures in ac-cordance with the temperature”,read the pre value on thet°C = 5 row.

0,832 MPa

2 Calculate the differenceof the at-mospheric pressure :0,1013 -- 0,0932

0,0081 MPa

3 Calculate the rated effective pres-sure pre :0,832 + 0,0081

0,8401 MPa

4 Filling is carried out to the calcu-lated pressure, plus 0,01 MPa,that is to say :0,8401 + 0,01

Pure SF6 gas filling pressure0,8501 MPa



Installation



L31--924EN/023/4


GRID

Calculation of the filling pressure at site

Measurement Write down the result measurement into the corresponding box :

Measure the atmospheric pressure in MPa. A ,

Measure the ambient temperature in °C. B

Calculation of thepure SF6 gas fillingpressure

Transfer the values into the corresponding box and write down the result :

With the help of the table (page 5) “Values of the SF 6 gaseffective pressures in accordance with the temperature”,determine the value “ pre“ in accordance with

the ambient temperature (B) "

pre

C ,

Value of the reference atmospheric pressure in MPa D 0 , 1 0 1

Transfer the value of the local atmospheric pressure(A) " A -- ,

Calculate the difference of the atmospheric pressure(D -- A) " E ,

Transfer the value (C) "

C+ ,

Calculate the rated effective pressure(E + C) " F ,

The filling with SF6 gas is carried outto the calculated pressure, plus 0.01 MPa, + 0 , 0 1

(F + 0.01) " G ,



Installation



L31--924EN/024/4


GRID

Values of the SF6 gas effective pressures in accordance with the temperature

Rated effective pres-sure 0.9 MPa

Values of theSF6 gas effective pressures (MPa) corrected in accordance withtemperature for an atmospheric pressure of 101.3 kPa :

t_C pre pae pme t_C pre pae pme

--20 0,718 0,610 0,587 11 0,859 0,726 0,698

--19 0,723 0,614 0,590 12 0,864 0,730 0,701

--18 0,727 0,618 0,594 13 0,868 0,734 0,705

--17 0,732 0,621 0,597 14 0,873 0,738 0,709

--16 0,736 0,625 0,601 15 0,877 0,741 0,712

--15 0,741 0,629 0,605 16 0,882 0,745 0,716

--14 0,745 0,633 0,608 17 0,886 0,749 0,719

--13 0,750 0,636 0,612 18 0,891 0,753 0,723

--12 0,754 0,640 0,615 19 0,895 0,756 0,726

--11 0,759 0,644 0,619 20 0,900 0,760 0,730--10 0,764 0,648 0,623 21 0,905 0,764 0,734

--9 0,768 0,651 0,626 22 0,909 0,767 0,737

--8 0,773 0,655 0,630 23 0,914 0,771 0,741

--7 0,777 0,659 0,633 24 0,918 0,775 0,744

--6 0,782 0,663 0,637 25 0,923 0,779 0,748

--5 0,786 0,666 0,640 26 0,927 0,782 0,751

--4 0,791 0,670 0,644 27 0,932 0,786 0,755

--3 0,795 0,674 0,648 28 0,936 0,790 0,759

--2 0,800 0,678 0,651 29 0,941 0,794 0,762

--1 0,805 0,681 0,655 30 0,945 0,797 0,766

0 0,809 0,685 0,658 31 0,950 0,801 0,7691 0,814 0,689 0,662 32 0,955 0,805 0,773

2 0,818 0,693 0,666 33 0,959 0,809 0,777

3 0,823 0,696 0,669 34 0,964 0,812 0,780

4 0,827 0,700 0,673 35 0,968 0,816 0,784

5 0,832 0,704 0,676 36 0,973 0,820 0,787

6 0,836 0,708 0,680 37 0,977 0,824 0,791

7 0,841 0,711 0,683 38 0,982 0,827 0,794

8 0,845 0,715 0,687 39 0,986 0,831 0,798

9 0,850 0,719 0,691 40 0,991 0,835 0,802

10 0,855 0,723 0,694



Installation

Pre--filling with SF6 gas at 0.05 MPa

L31--951EN/051/4


Presentation

Principle The pre--filling of the pole with SF6 gas at 0.05 MPa must be done after the

vacuum operation.

NOTE : You are reminded that the gas used to fill the pole mustconform to the requirements laid out in IEC 60376.

Necessary equipmentand tools

List of the necessary ALSTOM Grid equipment and tools for the pre--fillingwith SF6 gas :


(4) Filling tool 1

(10) Pressure reducer 1

(8) SF6 gas bottle(s) *

* depending on the aparatus.

In this module This module contains the following topics:

Topic Page

Preparing the SF6 gas bottle 2

Pre--filling with SF6 gas 3



Installation


L31--951EN/052/4


Preparing the SF6 gas bottle

Process The table below gives the steps of preparing the SF6 gas bottle :

Step Action Diagram1 Remove the cover (6) and plug (7)

from the SF6 gas bottle (8). 7

6

8

SF6

2 Fit the pressure reducer (10) onthe SF6 gas bottle (8). 8

10SF6

3 Briefly open the SF6 gas bottle tap(9) and the cock (11) of the

pressure reducer to eliminate anyair inside the piping (approx. 20 sat low flow--rate).

9 Open

11Closed

SF6

4 Close the SF6 gas bottle tap (9)and the cock (11) of the pressurereducer.

NOTE : Keep the end of thetube (12) in high position tokeep the SF6 gas which itcontains and to prevent dampair from entering.

9 12

11SF6

Closed

END OF PROCEDURE



Installation


L31--951EN/053/4


Pre--filling with SF6 gas

Process The table below gives the steps of the pre--filling with SF6 gas operation :


1 Remove the valve cap (5) of thefilling tool (4).

5

4

2 D Open the SF6

gas bottle tap (9).

D Open and close the cock (11) of the pressure reducer to eliminateany air inside the tube (12)(approx. 3 s at low flow--rate).

D Close the SF6 gas bottle tap(9).

9

11

12

Open

ClosedSF6

3 Connect the tube (12) to the fillingtool (4).

12

4

4 Open the SF6 gas bottle tap (9)and adjust gas output by acting onthe cock (11) of the pressurereducer (reduced flow rate).

D Close the tap (9) from time totime to check pressure on thegauge (13).

D Start filling again until therequired pressure about 0.05 MPais reached.

D Close in this order : the tap (9),then the cock (11).

9

13

Open

11SF6 Closed

END OF PROCEDURE



Installation


L31--951EN/054/4





Installation

Filling with SF6 gas

L32--007EN/051/8


Presentation

Warning DUE TO RISK OF DAMAGE TO CERAMIC ENVELOPES DURING

TRANSPORTATION, PEOPLE PRESENT AT THE GAS FILLINGOPERATION SHOULD SHELTER THEMSELVES OR STAY AT AMINIMUM PROTECTION DISTANCE (ABOUT 50 m).


Necessary equipmentand tools

List of the necessary ALSTOM Grid equipment and tools for the filling withSF6 gas :


2 Filling tool 1

8 Pressure reducer 1

6 SF6 gas bottle(s) *

14 Gauge

0...1 MPa 1

* depending on the apparatus.


Topic Page

Filling with SF6 gas 2

Confirm the pressure 3

Checking pressure 4

Checking gas--tightness 6

Moisture content of SF6 gas in circuit--breaker 7



Installation


L32--007EN/052/8



Filling pressure

calculation

Calculate the SF6 gas filling pressure in accordance withthe temperature and

the local atmospheric pressure.Filling is carried out to calculated pressure plus 0.01 MPa.

See the module “SF6 gas monitoring” (Calculation of the filling pressure atsite).

Ambienttemperature

0°C

Process The table below gives the steps of the filling with SF6 gas operation :

7

11

Open

Closed9SF6

Step Action Comment

1 Open the SF6 gas bottle tap (7)and adjust gas output by acting onthe cock (9) of the pressurereducer (reduced flow rate).

Close the tap (7) from time totime to check pressure on thegauge (11).

2 Start filling again until therequired pressure is reached.

3 Close in this order : the tap (7),then the cock (9).



Installation


L32--007EN/053/8


Confirm the pressure

Process The table below gives the confirmation operation steps of the filling pressure

with SF6 gas :


1 Disconnect the tube (10) -- of thepressure reducer -- from thefillingtool (2).

NOTE : Keep theunconnected end of the tube(10) higher than the other end,to stop the SF6 gas which itcontains from escaping and toprevent moisture entering.

2

10

2 S Connect the tube (15) -- of thegauge 0--1 MPa (14) -- to thefilling tool (2).

S When the required pressure isconfirmed, remove the gauge(14) and and store it away fromhumidity.

14

15

2

3 Remove the filling tool (2) andrefit the plug (17) (4 daN.m)

2

17



Installation


L32--007EN/054/8


Checking pressure

Principle Having allowed the temperature to remain steady for at least 12 hours after

filling, it is necessary to check and definitively adjust the pressure to itscorrected value -- defined according to both ambient temperature andatmospheric pressure.

Preparation The table below gives the preparation steps before checking pressure :

Step Action Diagram

1 S Remove the plug (17) andinstall the filling tool (2).

S Unscrew the valve--cap (3).

17

2

3

2 S Connect the tube (15) -- of thegauge 0--1 MPa (14) -- to thefilling tool (2).

14

15

2




Installation


L32--007EN/055/8


Checking pressure, continued

Decision table The table below gives the process depending the pressure measured :

14

16

If the pressure measured is ... Action

correct End of control

too high Adjust the pressure by means of valve(16) on the gauge (14) to reach the

required corrected pressure.

too low

Top--up with SF6 gas

If the pressureadjustment

is ...Action

≤ 0.05 MPa End of control

> 0.05 MPa Proceed to anew inspectionafter astabilizationperiod of 2--3 hours.

End of control The table below gives the end steps of the checking pressure :

Step Action Diagram

1 Disconnect the gauge (14)0--1 MPa.

14

2 S Remove the filling tool (2)and re--install the plug (17),applying a tightening torque of 4 daN.m; leak--tightness is onlyguaranteed if this condition isrespected.

S Screw the valve--cap (3) onthe filling tool (2).

3

2

17



Installation


L32--007EN/056/8


Checking gas--tightness

Necessary

ALSTOM Grid tools

List of the ALSTOM Grid tools necessary for the tightness inspection :


12 Leak detector (optional) 1

Process Make sure that the plug (17) is perfectly leak--tight using the leak detector(12).

17

12



Installation


L32--007EN/057/8


Moisture content of SF6 gas in circuit--breaker

Principle This measurement is not required, the equipment being provided with

molecular sieves in sufficient quantity to give a dew point of ≤ 0°C (32°F) foran ambient temperature of 20°C (68°F), this applies for a unit filled to itsnominal pressure for 2 or 3 months.



Installation


L32--007EN/058/8





Commissioning

Pre--commissioning inspections

L34--011EN/061/6


Presentation

Introduction After installation of the bay, completion of all earth circuit and electrical

connections, it is necessary to perform certain pre--commissioninginspections.These inspections should be performed with the apparatus ready to becommissioned (energized), in other words

S LV electrical circuits conforming, in voltage and type, with the low--voltagediagrams and rating plate of the apparatus.

S SF6 or SF6+CF4 envelopes at rated SF6 or SF6+CF4 pressure.

NOTE : Rated pressure, pressure of equipment after SF6 or SF6+CF4gas filling.

S Flexible connections linking circuit--breaker to busbar installed.

Caution DURING OPERATIONS REQUIRED AS PART OF INSPECTIONPROGRAMME PRIOR TO COMMISSIONING, ALL POSSIBLE SAFETYPRECAUTIONS SHOULD BE TAKEN TO PROTECT PERSONNELWORKING ON THE EQUIPMENT.

In this module This module contains the following checking inspections :

Inspections Page

Pole/operating device coupling sleeve 2

Orientation and identification of interrupting chambers 3

SF6 or SF6+CF4 gas 4Operating device 5

Finish and test operations 6

Important reminder May we remind you that the Test Report prior to CommissioningRES * * * M *

Enclosed with this notice absolutely must be completed.

It must be filled in, dated, signed and sent backwithin two weeks following the tests to

ALSTOM GridService Contrats

130 rue Léom BLUM69611 Villeurbanne

FRANCE

Failing a return of the report within the allowed deadline,the warranty for the switchgear cannot be taken into

account and the customer’s liability may be pursued.

* There may be several RES



Commissioning


L34--011EN/062/6


Pole/operating device coupling sleeve

Checking Check that the blocking tool is not on the flange of the sleeve. Otherwise

remove it imperatively.



Commissioning


L34--011EN/063/6


Orientation and identification of interrupting chambers

Inspection Check that the interruption chambers are disposed correctly, the bosses (B1)

and (B2) must be situated on the same side as the operating mechanism (3).

Rule When facing bosses (B1) and (B2) :

-- chamber ”1” is on the left,

-- chamber ”2” is on the right.

Diagram

B2

3

B1



Commissioning


L34--011EN/064/6


SF6 or SF6+CF4 gas

Reminder SF6 or SF6+CF4 envelopes are at rated pressure following the SF6 or

SF6+CF4 gas filling operation.


Parameters Take note of parameters below :

S site altitude, in meters,

S atmospheric pressure of site in kPa,

S site temperature in °C.

Checking SF6 orSF6+CF4 gas

SF6 or SF6+CF4 pressure values must obligatorily be read on the pressureinspection gauge (tooling). Pay no attention to indications given by the dialdensimeter on the filling control block (where applicable) ; it is not accurateenough for this inspection.

See the module “Calculation of the SF6 or SF6+CF4 gas filling pressureto using the pressure gauge (tool)”.

The table below gives the steps of checking :

Step Action Comment

1 Measure SF6 or SF6+CF4 gaspressure by means of thepressure inspection gauge(tooling)

Follow the instructions given inmodule ”Filling with SF6 orSF6+CF4 gas”.

2 Correct pressure found. Follow the instructions given inmodule ”Calculation of the SF6

or SF6+CF4 gas fillingpressure to using the pressuregauge (tool)”.

SF6 or SF6+CF4 gashumidity level

The SF6 or SF6+CF4 humidity level need not be known as the equipment isfitted with molecular sieves in sufficient numbers to give a dew point lowerthan, or equal to, 0°C at an ambient temperature of 20°C, for an apparatusfilled to its rated pressure for 2 or 3 months.

Checking tightnessof assemblagesunder SF6 or SF6+CF4pressure

Each on site assemblage of parts subjected to SF6 or SF6+CF4 gas requiresseals. The quality of these assemblages must be checked.This inspection should be undertaken once all the filling and pressure controloperations are finished.

Execute this checking according to instructions given in module ”SF6

orSF6+CF4 gas monitoring”.



Commissioning


L34--011EN/065/6


Operating device

Measurements Note the supply voltage of motors on the operating mechanism terminals.

Inspection Check that the following items are working correctly :

-- heating,

-- lighting (where applicable),

-- connections on terminals (no excessive tightening).



Commissioning


L34--011EN/066/6


Finish and test operations

Finish Check the general appearance of the apparatus and touch up paint if

necessary before commissioning.

Test operations S The connection of auxiliary circuits is sufficiently advanced to allow remote

controls to be used.

S Perform 5 CLOSING -- OPENING cycles electrically, by remote control.

Caution DUE TO RISK OF DAMAGE TO CERAMIC ENVELOPES DURINGTRANSPORTATION, PEOPLE PRESENT AT THE TEST OPERATIONSSHOULD SHELTER THEMSELVES OR STAY AT A MINIMUM

PROTECTION DISTANCE (ABOUT 50 m).



GRID

ALSTOM Grid SAS130, rue Léon Blum

69611 VilleurbanneFrance

RAPPORT D’ESSAIS AVANT MISE EN SERVICECOMMISSIONING TEST REPORT

RELACIÓN DE ENSAYOS ANTES DE LA PUESTA EN SERVICIO

Service QualitéQuality DepartmentServicio de calidad

Formulaire RES 310 M Page / Página : 1/12

EB3 90 020-D4 RES 310 M 010 06/03/2012N° d’Instruction Indice Date de révision

DISJONCTEUR À HEXAFLUORURE DE SOUFRE TYPESULFUR HEXAFLUORIDE CIRCUIT BREAKER TYPE _______________ INTERRUPTOR DE HEXAFLUORURO DE AZUFRE TIPO

avec commande(s) mécanique(s) type with __ mechanical control mechanism(s) type __________ con organo(s) de maniobra mecànico tipo

CLIENT / CUSTOMER / CLIENTE ____________________

Poste/Substation/Subestación _________________________

Référence cli ent /Customer’s reference/ Referencia del cliente ____________________

Commande ALSTOM N° Repère ALSTOM order N° _______________ Item __________ N° de pedido ALSTOM Ref

Norme Spécification du clientStandard __________ Customer’s specification _______________ Norma Especificación del cliente

CARACTÉRISTIQUES/CHARACTERISTICS/CARACTERISTICAS

Tension/Voltage/ Tensión _____ kV Fréquence / Frequency / Frecuencia ____ Hz

Courant en service continu /Normal current/ Corriente en servicio continuo ______ A

Pouvoir de coupure en court-circui t/Short-circuit breaking current/Poder de corte en corto circuito ______ kA

Pression absolue du gaz SF6 à 20°C : Pression relative du gaz SF6 à Absolute SF6 gas pressure at 20°C : _____ Mpa Relative SF6 gas pressure at 20°C and 1013 hPa : ___ MpaPresión absoluta del gas SF6 à 20°C Presión relativa del gas SF6 à

Tension d’alimentation des cir cuits auxili aires/Supply voltage of auxiliary circuits/Tensión de alimentación de los circuitos auxiliares

Bobines Moteur ChauffageCoils ____ V(____) Motor ____ V( ____ ) Heater ____ V( ____ )Bobinas Motor Calefación

Signalisation Circuit de commande Alarm ____ V( ____ ) Control circuit ____ V( ____ )Señalización Circuito de mando

Cablage alimentations / Supply voltage wiring Définitif/ definitiveTemporaire/ Temporary

Le matériel a subi les contrôl es et essais avant mise en service, conformément au fascicule (contrô les avant mise en service).

The material was subjected to the inspections and tests prior to commissioning as required in sections (inspections commissioning).El material fue sometido a las inspecciones y a los ensayos antes de la puesta en servicio como requerido en las secciones (inspecciones antes de lapuesta en servicio).

Date de fin de montageErection completion date ___________Fecha de conclusion de montaje

Réalisé parPerformed by ____________ Realizado por

Pour le clientFor the customer _______________ Para el cliente

Date des essais de mise en serviceCommissioning date ____________ Fecha de puebras para puesta en servicio

Réalisés parPerformed by ____________ Realizado por

Pour le clientFor the customer _______________ Para el cliente



GRID

ALSTOM Grid SAS

130, rue Léon Blum69611 Villeurbanne

France

_______________ / __________

Service Qualité RAPPORT D’ESSAIS AVANT MISE EN SERVICE Page Quality Department COMMISSIONING TEST REPORT 2/12Servicio de calidad RELACIÓN DE ENSAYOS ANTES DE LA PUESTA EN SERVICIO Página


CONTRÔLE PRÉLIMINAIRES AVANT INSTALLATIONPRELIMINARY INSPECTIONS BEFORE INSTALLATIONINSPECCIÓNES PRELIMINARES ANTES DE LA INSTALACIÓN

Constat sur le siteVerification at site

Verificación en el sitio

PôlePôle APolo

PôlePôle B Polo

PôlePôle C

PoloOrgane de manœuvreOperating mechanismOrgano de maniobra

__________ __________ __________État des emballagesCondition of packings

Condición de los embalajes

Élément de pôlePole elementElemento de polo

__________ __________ __________

Sous abriUnder shelter Al abrigo

__________ __________ __________

CorrecteSatisfactoryCorrecto

__________ __________ __________Réalisation du stockageStorage Almacenamiento

DéfectueuseUnsactisfactoryDefectuoso

__________ __________ __________

Al imentation du chauffage des commandesHeating system supply of mechanisms Alimentación del calamiento de los mandos

__________ __________ __________

Vérification de la présence de la pression SF6 detransportChecking of transport SF6 pressureComprobación de la presión de SF6 de transporte

__________ __________ __________

Observations – Remarks – Observaciones



GRID

ALSTOM Grid SAS


France

_______________ / __________



IDENTIFICATIONIDENTIFICATIONIDENTIFICACIÓN

PôlePolePolo

Repère / N° têtes / N° co lonnesItem / N° heads / N° columns

Referencia / N° cabezas / N° columnas1 __________

_______________

_______________

4 __________

_______________

_______________Pôle A7 __________

_______________

_______________

10 __________

_______________

_______________2 __________

_______________

_______________

5 __________

_______________

_______________Pôle B8 __________

_______________

_______________

11 __________

_______________

_______________

3 __________

_______________

_______________

6 __________

_______________

_______________Pôle C

9 __________

_______________

_______________

12 __________

_______________

_______________

10 11 12

7 8 9

4 5 6

1 2 3

Pôle A Pôle B Pôle C

Nombre d’armoiresNumber of cubicles __Numero de armarios

Fonctionnement unipolaireOne pole operation ____Funcionamiento unipolar

Fonctionnement tripolaireThree-pole operation ____ Funcionamiento tripolar



GRID

ALSTOM Grid SAS


France

_______________ / __________



VÉRIFICATION APRÈS MONTAGECHECKS AFTER ERECTIONCOMPROBACIÓN DESPUÈS INSTALACIÓN

Schéma de câblageWiring diagram _______________ Esquema de alambrado

Croquis de montage Assembly drawing _______________ Dibujo de instalación

Conformité croquis montageConformity to instalation drawing __________ Conformidad con dibujo de montaje

Conformité schéma fil erieConformity to wiring diagram __________Conformidad con esquema de alambrado

Vérification de l’assemblageVérification of assembly __________ Comprobación del montaje

Conformité signalisation optiqueConfomity of optical indication __________Conformidad de la señalización optica

NoticeInstructions manual _______________ Manual de instrucciónes

RELEVÉS DES COMPTEURS DE MANOEUVRESNOTED DOWN THE COUNTER READINGS ANOTAR NUMERO DE MANOBRIAS DE LOS CONTADORES

Pôle/Pole/PoloPôle A

Pôle/Pole/PoloPôle B

Pôle/Pole/PoloPôle C

Relevé des compteurs de manœuvrespendant remplissage en SF6 etaccouplement au pôleNoted down the counter readings during thefilling up of SF6 and coupling of the pole Anotar numero de maniobras de los contadoresdurante el llenado en SF6 y acoplamiento alpolo

_______ _______ _______

OBSERVATIONS – REMARKS – OBSERVACIONES



GRID

ALSTOM Grid SAS


France

_______________ / __________



ESSAIS DE TENUE À LA TENSION DES CIRCUITS AUXILIAIRES ET DE COMMANDE

VOLTAGE WITHSTAND TESTS ON AUXILIARY AND CONTROL CIRCUITSENSAYOS DE TENSIÓN SOPORTADA DE LOS CIRCUITOS AUXLIARES Y DE MANDO

App arei l de mesure – test equipment N° de série – serial number Calibration date Observations

Appl ication d’une tension d’essai de kV (valeur ef ficace) pendant s, entre la f ilerie et le bât i. Application of a test voltage of ______ kV (rms value) for ______ s, between wiring and the base. Aplicación de una tensión de ensayo de kV, (valor eficaz) durante s, entre la cableria y la base.

Les moteurs et les équipements, déjà essayés conformément à leur propre spécification, ont étédéconnectés pendant ces essais.The motors and equipments tested previously in accordance with their own specification were disconnectedduring these tests.Los motores y equipos sometidos anteriormente a ensayos de acuerdo con sus especificaciones propias fuerondesconnectados durante estos ensayos.

MESURAGE DE LA RÉSISTANCE DU CIRCUIT PRINCIPALMEASUREMENT OF THE RESISTANCE OF THE MAIN CIRCUITMEDICIÓN DE LA RESISTENCIA DEL CIRCUITO PRINCIPAL


Courant continu d’essai Température au moment des essaisTest direct current 100 A Temperature at testing time ______ °CCorriente continua de ensayo Temperatura al momento de las pruebas

PôlePôle A

Polo

PôlePôle B

Polo

PôlePôle C Polo

1 _____ 4 _____ 2 _____ 5 _____ 3 _____ 6 _____ Valeurs en / Values in / Valores en : µΩ

7 _____ 10 _____ 8 _____ 11 _____ 9 _____ 12 _____



GRID

ALSTOM Grid SAS


France

_______________ / __________



VÉRIFICATION DE LA PRESSION DU GAZGAS PRESSURE CHECK MPa COMPROBACIÒN DE LA PRESIÒN DEL GAS


SF6 pur / pure SF6 / SF6 puroValeurs en pression absolue

Mélange SF6/CF4 / mix SF6/CF4 / mezcla SF6/CF4 Values in absolute pressionValores en la presión absoluta

_____ % SF6 _____ % CF4

Al ti tude Pression barométr ique Température Altitude ______ m Barometric pressure ______ hPa Temperature ______ °C Altitud Presión barométrica Temperatura

Pression absolue / Absolute pressurePressión absoluta

Pole 1 Pole 2 Pole 3

Mesurage de la pression de remplissageFilling pressure measurementMedición de la presión de llenado

______ ______

______

Valeur calculée équivalente à 20°C en MPa absolueEquivalent computed values at 20°C in MPa absolute

Valores computados equivalentes para 20°C en MPaabsolutos

______ ______

______

Pression relative / relative pressurePressión relativa

At 20°C and 1013 hPaPole 1 Pole 2 Pole 3

Mesurage de la pression de remplissageFilling pressure measurementMedición de la presión de llenado

______ ______

______

Valeur calculée équivalente en MPaEquivalent computed values in MPaValores computados equivalentes en MPa

______ ______ ______




GRID

ALSTOM Grid SAS


France

_______________ / __________



CONTRÔLE DES DENSIMÈTRES DE SURVEILLANCE DE LA PRESSION (press ion relat ive en MPa)GAS PRESSURE MONITORING DENSIMETERS INSPECTION (relative pressure in MPa)COMPROBACIÓN DE LOS DENSIMETROS DE VIGILANCIA DE LA PRESIÓN (pressión relativa en MPa)


Pression barométriqueBarometric pressure ________ hPaPresión barométrica

Pole 1 Pole 2 Pole 3

TempératureTemperature ________ Temperatura

Seuil ThresholdUmbral

1


2


3


1


2


3


1


2


3Mesurage des pressions d es seuilsThresholds pressures measurementMedición de las presiones des losumbrales

______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______

Valeur calculée équivalenteà 20°C 1013 hPa en MPa

Equivalent computed valuesValores computados equivalentes

______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______




GRID

ALSTOM Grid SAS


France

_______________ / __________



ESSAIS DE FONCTIONNEMENT MÉCANIQUE DURÉES DE FONCTIONNEMENTMECHANICAL OPERATING TESTS OPERATING TIMES msENSAYOS DE FUNCIONAMIENTO MECÁNICO TIEMPO DE OPERACIÓN


Tension d’ alimentation sur le si te.Supply voltage on site ____ V(DC)Tensión de alimentación sobre el sitio

PôlePôle A

Polo

PôlePôle B Polo

PôlePôle C

Polo

1 4 7 10 2 5 8 11 3 6 9 12

C _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ Manœuvre de fermetureClosing operationManiobra de cierre

SC _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____

way 1 C _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ Manœuvre d’ ouvertureOpening operationManiobra de apertura

way 1 SC _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____

Way 2 C _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ Manœuvre d’ ouvertureOpening operationManiobra de apertura Way 2

SC _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____

C _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ Cycle de manœuvre de fermeture-ouvertureClose-open operating cycle : COCiclo de maniobras de cierre-apertura O _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____

Durée de fermeture-ouvertureClose-open timeTiempo de cierre-apertura

_____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____

O _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____

C _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ Séquence de manœuvreOperating sequence : O-COSecuencia de maniobra

O _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____

Durée d’ou verture-fermetureOpen-close timeTiempo de apertura-cierre

_____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____

Durée de fermetureClose-Open timeTiempo de cierre-apertura

_____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____



GRID

ALSTOM Grid SAS


France

_______________ / __________



MESURAGE DES ÉCARTS DE SIMULTANÉITÉCOINCIDENCE DEVIATION MEASUREMENT msMEDICIÓN DE LAS DESVIATIONES DE SIMULTANEIDAD

PôlePôle A Polo

PôlePôle B

Polo

PôlePôle C Polo

FermetureClosingCierre

______ ______ ______

Ouverture voie 1

Opening way 1 Apertura via 1 ______ ______ ______

Entre éléments de coupure d’un même pôle

Between breaking elements of a same poleEntre elementos de interrupción de un mismo polo

Ouverture voie 2Opening way 2 Apertura via 2

______ ______ ______

FermetureClosingCierre

______


______ Entre pôlesBetween polesEntre polos


______

MESURAGE DES DURÉES DE FONCTIONNEMENT DES CONTACTS AUXILIAIRESMEASUREMENT OF AUXILIARY CONTACT OPERATING DURATIONS msMEDICIÓN DE DURACIONES DE FUNCIONAMIENTO DE LOS CONTACTOS AUXILIARES

Type de contactContact type

Tipo de contacto

PôlePôle A

Polo

PôlePôle B

Polo

PôlePôle C

Polo

52 b ______ ______ ______ Manœuvre de fermetureClosing operation

Maniobra de cierre 52a ______ ______ ______ 52b ______ ______ ______ Manœuvre d’ouverture

Opening operationManiobra de apertura 52a ______ ______ ______



GRID

ALSTOM Grid SAS


France

_______________ / __________



MESURAGE DE LA RÉSISTANCE DE LA CHAMBRE AUXILIAIREMEASUREMENT OF THE AUXILIARY CHAMBER RESISTORMEDICIÓN DE LA RESISTENCIA DE LA CAMARA AUXILIAR


Pôle A Pôle B Pôle C

Valeur enValues in Ω

Valores en

1

_____

4

_____

2

_____

5

_____

3

_____

6

_____

7

_____

10

_____

8

_____

11

_____

9

_____

12

_____

DURÉE D’INSERTION DE LA RÉSISTANCERESISTOR INSERTION TIME msTIEMPO DE INSERCIÓN DE LA RESISTENCIA

Sécurité à l’ouverture de la résistanceSafety at resistor openingSecuritad a la apertura de la resistencia

1

_____

4

_____

2

_____

5

_____

3

_____

6

_____

7 _____

10 _____

8 _____

11 _____

9 _____

12 _____

Durée d’insertion de la résistanceResistor insertion timeTiempo de inserción de la resistencia

1

_____

4

_____

2

_____

5

_____

3

_____

6

_____

7

_____

10

_____

8

_____

11

_____

9

_____

12

_____

MESURAGE DES DURÉES DE RÉARMEMENT DE L ’ORGANE DE COMMANDEMEASUREMENT OF OPERATING MECHANISM RECLOSING DURATIONS sMEDICIÓN DE DURACIONES DE REARME DEL ORGANO DE MANIOBRA

Durée de réarmement après un CReclosing duration after one CDuración de rearme despues de una C

______ ______ ______



GRID

ALSTOM Grid SAS


France

_______________ / __________



VÉRIFICATION DIVERSESVARIOUS CHECKINGSCOMPROBACIÓNES DIVERSAS

Dispositif d’anti-pompage

Anti-pumping device

Dispositivo de anti-bombeo

Ouverture de secours

Emergency opening

Apertura de emergencia

Fermeture localemécanique/électrique

Local closing mechanical/electrical

Cierre local mecánico/electrico

Ouverture locale mécanique/électrique

Local opening mechanical/electrical

Apertura local mecánico/electrico

Fermeture à distance

Remote closing

Cierre à distancia

Ouverture à distance

Remote opening

Apertura à distancia

Chauffage thermostaté

Thermostated heating

Calefacción con termostats

Signalisation défaut SF6 1er seuil

SF6 fault indication – 1st thereshold

Señalisación de falta de SF6 1o umbral

Chauffage permanent

Permanent heating

Calefacción permanente

Signalisation défaut SF6 2nd seuil

SF6 fault indication – 2nd

thereshold

Señalisación de falta de SF6 2o umbral

Serrage des bornes BTTightening of LV terminals

Apriete de las terminales BT

Peinture et protection contre la corrosion .

Painting and protection against corrosion

Pintura y protección contra la corrosion

Séquence de fonctionnement

Operating sequence

Secuencia de maniobra

Contrôle de l’étanchéité SF6 des assemblages

SF6 tightness testing of assemblies

Comprobación de estanqueidad SF6 de losmontajes

Pôle A Pôle B Pôle C Relevé des compt eurs de manœuvresReading of operating counters

Lectura de contadores de maniobra

_____ _____ _____

Dans le cas des appareils en T un min imum de 50 manœuvres doit être réalisées sur site.D'après norme CEI 62271-100 pour validation des accouplements réalisés sur site.For the T shaped breakers a minimum of 50 operations has to be done on site. According to IEC 62271-100 standard to validate coupling made on site.En el caso de interuptors en T, se debe llevar a cabo un mínimo de 50 maniobras en la obra.de acuerdo con la norma IEC 62271-110 para validación de los acoplamientos realizados en la obra.



GRID

ALSTOM Grid SAS


France

_______________ / __________



OBSERVATIONS – REMARKS – OBSERVACIONES

ALSTOM Grid SASSociété par actions simplifiée au capital de 74.478.096 € Siège social: Immeuble Le Galilée – 51, esplanade du Général de Gaulle 92907 La Défense Cedex (France)

389 191 800 RCS Nanterre



GRID

ALSTOM Grid SAS

130, rue Léon Blum

Breaker type : Serial number : Item :

RPH2 Type : Serial number : Date :

Country : Site :

SYSTEM DATA

System frequency 16 2/3 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz

Control voltage ………. Volts

Reference phase A B C

Rated pressure : ………. Bars

Switching program Shunt Reactor Capacitor Bank Transformer

User Program Password : 0000

POW L1 L2 L3

Time - Channel 1

Neutral isolated

Time - Channel 1

Neutral grounded

Time - Channel 2

Neutral isolated

Time - Channel 2

Neutral grounded

VERIFICATIONS

(or evently with rotation)

Check the earthing of the RPH2 (on lateral flange)

Measurement of operating times (A, B and C)

(For multichambers CB, slowliest chamber on closing and fastest on opening)

Calculation of timeshift between main contact & Csa

Validation of the parameters

(e.g. with TM1600 + MA61 + sinusoide generator)

FINAL PARAMETERSL1 L2 L3

Operating time CH1 ms ms ms

Operating time CH2 ms ms ms

Arcing time CH1 ms ms ms

Arcing time CH2 ms ms ms

Aux timeshift CH1 ms ms ms

Aux timeshift CH2 ms ms ms

Test completion date For the installator, prepared by :

Date de fin des essais Pour l'installateur, établi par

For the customer Checked by ALSTOM Grid

Pour le client Vérifié par ALSTOM Grid

Check wiring according to the electrical scheme

ms ms

ms

ms

ms

ms

ms

ms

ms

ms ms ms

69611 Villeurbanne France

If the reference voltage is different from Phase A, mind to rotate the phases on orders outputs (channel A and channel B), auxiliaries and current measurements

CHECKLIST RPH2

WITH THE CIRCUIT BREAKER ON SITERES 310 M RPH2 page 1/2



GRID

ALSTOM Grid SAS

130, rue Léon Blum

69611 Villeurbanne France

Measurements for RPH2 parametrization RES 310 M RPH2 page 2/2

Phase A

SC Un C SO Un O

(m/s) (V) (m/s) (V)

operation 1

operation 2

operation 3

operation 4

operation 5

Total of the column 0 0 0 0 0 0

Mean value = Total/5 0 0 0 0 0 0

00

Phase B

SC Un C SO Un O

(m/s) (V) (m/s) (V)

operation 1

operation 2

operation 3

operation 4

operation 5



0

0

Phase C

SC Un C SO Un O

(m/s) (V) (m/s) (V)

operation 1

operation 2

operation 3

operation 4operation 5



0

0

0

0

MC = Main Contacts O = Opening SC = Speed of Closing

Csa = Secondary Contacts a C = Closing SO = Speed of Opening

Mean value MC C - Mean value Csa C

Mean value of the 3 closing speeds (m/s)

Mean value of the 3 opening speeds (m/s)

Mean value MC O - Mean value Csa O



CP C

(ms)

Csa C

(ms)

MC O

(ms)

Csa O

(ms)

Csa O

(ms)

CP O

(ms)

Csa O

(ms)

MC C

(ms)

Csa C

(ms)

MC O

(ms)


MC C

(ms)

Csa C

(ms)




GRID

ALSTOM Grid SAS

130, rue Léon Blum

69611 Villeurbanne

France

CA 103 271 3 INSTRUCTION OPERATIONNELLE

CA 103 271 3 14/10/2003 010 20/01/2011 1/5N° d’instruction Date d’émission Indice Date de révision Page

Le présent document, propriété exclusive d’ALSTOM, ne peut être reproduit qu’avec l’aval du responsable deservice et ne peut être diffusé à un tiers qu’avec l’aval du responsable de service et du responsable qualité.

HIGH VOLTAGE PRODUCTS - 130, rue Léon Blum 69611- Villeurbanne Cedex - France

Tél : +33 (0)4 72 68 34 34 - Fax : +33 (0)4 72 68 39 22

Critère d'Acceptation ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA

QUALITÉ - QUALITY ENVIRONNEMENT - ENVIRONMENT SÉCURITÉ - SECURITY

ÉMETTEUR - TRANSMITTER : QUALITE : PM Q1\- QUALITE MONTAGE :PA Q04\I O A de la Quali té MontageQUALITY DEPARTEMENT01/19/2012

N° CRITÈRE D’ACCEPTATION ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA NUMBER CA 103 271 3INDICE : 010

OBJET - TITLE : DISJONCTEUR GL315X (D) À GL317X (D) À COMMANDE MÉCANIQUE FK3.5 - MONTAGE SITE

CIRCUIT BREAKER GL315X (D) à GL31X (D) WITH SPRING MECHANISM FK3.5 – SITE ERECTION

- DESTINATAIRES - EXEMPLARIES :

Pas de poste OPM en diffusion

Rédacteur(s) :Drafter visaMALATIER ThierrySigné le 01/18/2012

Approbateur(s) : Approver visaALAMEDDINE AlaaSigné le 01/18/2012

Vérificateur(s) :Supervisor visaDOUMMAR GeorgesSigné le 01/18/2012



GRID

ALSTOM Grid SAS

130, rue Léon Blum

69611 Villeurbanne

France


CA 103 271 3 14/10/2003 010 20/01/2011 2/5

N° d’instruction Date d’émission Indice Date de révision Page


VALIDITÉVALIDITY

DISJONCTEUR : GL 315X (D) à GL317X (D)CIRCUIT BREAKER

PRESSION SF6 : Pre = 0,55 à 1.0 MPa (absolue)SF6 PRESSURE

COMMANDE : MÉCANIQUE FK 3.5MECHANISM : SPRING MECHANISM

DÉFINITION DES DURÉES

DURÉE DE FERMETURE : Intervalle de tempsentre l'instant de mise sous tension du circuit defermeture et l'instant où les contacts se touchentdans tous les pôles.

DURÉE D'OUVERTURE : Intervalle de tempsentre l'instant de mise sous tension dudéclencheur et l'instant de la séparation descontacts d'arc sur tous les pôles (ou des contactsdu simulateur commandés par la charge fictive).

DURÉE D'OUVERTURE-FERMETURE : Intervalle

de temps entre l'instant de séparation des contactsdans tous les pôles, et l'instant où les contacts setouchent dans le premier pôle pendant unemanœuvre de refermeture (refermeture : l'appareilest refermé automatiquement après un intervallede temps prédéterminé -195 ms-).

DURÉE DE FERMETURE-OUVERTURE :Intervalle de temps entre l'instant où les contactsse touchent dans le premier pôle pendant unemanœuvre de fermeture, et l'instant où lescontacts d'arc sont séparés dans tous les pôlespendant la manœuvre d'ouverture qui lui fait suite

(le déclencheur d'ouverture est mis sous tensionau moment où les contacts se touchent dans lepremier pôle pendant la fermeture).

ÉCART DE SIMULTANÉITÉ ENTRE CHAMBRESD'UN MÊME PÔLE : Pour la même manœuvredifférence de temps maximale entre les instants oùles contacts des chambres se touchent à lafermeture et différence de temps maximale entreles instants de séparation des contacts deschambres à l'ouverture.

TIME DEFINITION

CLOSING TIME : Interval of time betweenenergizing the closing circuit and the instant whenthe contacts touch in all poles.

OPENING TIME : Interval of time between theinstant of energizing the opening release and theinstant when the arcing contacts have separated inall poles (or simulator contacts controled by thedummy load).

OPEN-CLOSE TIME : Interval of time between the

instant when the arcing contacts have separated inall poles and the instant when the contacts touch inthe first pôle during a reclosing operation (reclosing: the equipment is automatically reclosed after apredetermined interval of time -195 ms-).

CLOSE OPEN TIME : Interval of time between theinstant when the contacts touch in the first poleduring a closing operation, and the instant whenthe arcing contacts have separated in all polesduring the subsequent opening operation (theopening release is energizing when the contacts

touch in the first pole during the closing operation).

DEVIATION BETWEEN CHAMBERS OF THESAME POLE : For the same operation maximumdeviation between the instants when the chamberscontacts touch during the closing operation andmaximum deviation between the instants when thechambers contacts are separated during theopening operation.



GRID

ALSTOM Grid SAS

130, rue Léon Blum

69611 Villeurbanne

France


CA 103 271 3 14/10/2003 010 20/01/2011 3/5



ÉCART DE SIMULTANÉITÉ ENTRE PÔLES : Pourla même manœuvre, différence de temps maximaleentre les instants où les contacts de pôles se touchentà la fermeture et différence de temps maximale entreles instants de séparation des contacts des pôles àl'ouverture.Dans le cas de pôle multi-chambres, le pôle estconsidéré fermé quand la dernière chambre estfermée et il est considéré ouvert quand la premièrechambre est ouverte.

DUREE D’INSERTION DE LA RESISTANCE : surune manœuvre de fermeture, intervalle de tempsentre l’entrée en contact des contacts d’arc etl’entrée en contact des contacts de l’inséreur(résistance court-circuitée).

Remarque : la durée de fermeture au sens de lanorme CEI et pour les appareils avec résistanced’insertion correspond à la somme de la durée defermeture et de la durée d’insertion telles quedéfinies précédemment.

DEVIATION BETWEEN POLES : For the sameoperation maximum deviation between the instantswhen the poles contacts touch during the closingoperation and maximum deviation between theinstants when the pales contacts are separatedduring the opening operation.In the case of multichambers poles, the pole isconsidered closed when the last chamber is closedand it is considered opened when the first chamberis opened.

RESISTOR INSERTION TIME : during a closingoperation, interval of time between the instantwhen the arcing contacts are touching and theinstant when the inseror contacts are touching(resistance short-circuited).

Note : the closing time according the IEC standardfor circuit-breakers with switching resistors is equalto the sum of the closing time and resistor insertiontime as défined above.



GRID

ALSTOM Grid SAS

130, rue Léon Blum

69611 Villeurbanne

France


CA 103 271 3 14/10/2003 010 20/01/2011 4/5



DURÉES DE FONCTIONNEMENT (en ms à tension assignée)MECHANICAL OPERATING TIMES ( in ms at rated voltage)

DURÉES DES CHAMBRESTIMINGS OF CHAMBERS

MANOEUVREOPERATION

Minimum Maximum

Fermeture - Closing 94 114Ouverture O1/O2 - Opening O1/O2 21 27Fermeture par relais TEC – Closing with relay TEC 103 128Fermeture par relais Allen Bradley - Closing with relay Allen Bradley 113 138

Fermeture par relais FINDER - Closing with relay FINDER 101 127Ouverture O1/O2 par relais TECOpening with relay O1/O2 with relay TEC

28 42

Ouverture O1/O2 par relais Allen BradleyOpening O1/O2 with relay Allen Bradley

36 50

Ouverture O1/O2 par relais FINDER - Opening O1/O2 with relay FINDER 28 40Fermeture de CO - Closing of CO 94 114Ouverture de CO - Opening of CO 43 59CO 52 85

1ère Ouverture de O-CO - 1st Opening of O-CO 21 27

Fermeture de O-CO - Closing of O-CO 94 114

2ème Ouverture de O-CO - 2nd Opening of O-CO 43 59Insertion de la résistance à la fermeture – Resistor insertion on closing 6 9

DURÉES DES CONTACTS AUXILIAIRESTIMINGS OF AUXILIARY CONTACTS

TYPE DE CONTACT - MANOEUVRETYPE CONTACT - OPERATION

Minimum Maximum

Type a / Fermeture de CO - Closing of CO 95 135Type b / Fermeture de CO - Closing of CO 80 110

Type a / Ouverture de CO - Opening of CO 31 61Type b / Ouverture de CO - Opening of CO 39 69

Type a / 1ère Ouverture de O-CO - 1st Opening of O-CO 9 25

Type b / 1ère Ouverture de O-CO - 1st Opening of O-CO 20 33

Type a / Fermeture de O-CO - Closing of O-CO 95 135Type b / Fermeture de O-CO - Closing of O-CO 80 110

Type a / 2ème Ouverture de O-CO - 2nd Opening of O-CO 31 61

Type b / 2ème Ouverture de O-CO - 2nd Opening of O-CO 39 69



GRID

ALSTOM Grid SAS

130, rue Léon Blum

69611 Villeurbanne

France


CA 103 271 3 14/10/2003 010 20/01/2011 5/5



ÉCART ENTRE CHAMBRES D'UN MÊME POLE (en ms à tension assignée)DEVIATIONS BETWEEN CHAMBERS OF THE SAME POLE (in ms at rated voltage)

MANOEUVREOPERATION

Maximum

Fermeture - Closing 2Ouverture - Opening 2

ÉCART ENTRE POLES (1) (en ms à tension assignée)DEVIATIONS BETWEEN POLES (1) (in ms at rated voltage)

MANOEUVREOPERATION

Maximum

Fermeture - Closing 5Ouverture - Opening 3

DURÉES DE REARME (en s à tension assignée)

CHARGING TIME (in s at rated voltage)

Tension Moteur en VMotor Voltage in V

Maximum

toutesall

10

RESISTANCE DE CONTACT DU CIRCUIT PRINCIPAL (sans prise de courant)(en sous courant continu de 100 A)MAIN CIRCUIT RESISTANCE (without HV terminal)

(in with a 100 A direct courrent)

Type de chambreType of chamber

Maximum

105/ 4 90105/ 5 93105/ 7 95

105/ 11 93105/12 96105/13 93

GL316X 5500A 105/12 70

(1) Dans le cas d’un disjoncteur un ipolaire, ne pas tenir compte de l’écart entre pôles.(1) In the case of single pole breaker, deviations between poles c riteria do not apply .



Maintenance

Maintenance plan

L51--004EN/051/6


Presentation

Introduction GL circuit--breakers use pure SF6 gas as an arc quenching medium (or a

SF6+CF4 gas mixture) and require only a reduced amount of maintenance.


Topic Page

Maintenance plan 2

Maintenance operations 3

Detail of maintenance operations 4



Maintenance

Maintenance plan

L51--004EN/052/6


Maintenance plan

Maintenance

frequency

Under normal operating conditions, the maintenance plan may be defined as

follows :

Type ofexamination

Frequency Comment

Maintenancevisits

Once or twice a year

It is advisable to performat least 2 CO duty cyclesper year, when apparatusare scarcely used, in orderto check that thecircuit--breaker andassociated controlcircuits are working

properly.

Inspections Every five years

This necessitatescircuit--breaker shutdown. Itis not necessary, however todismantle interruptingchambers and othersub--assemblies.

Overhaul

Perform when one of thefollowing criteria isreached :

D operating life time≥ 20 years

D number of mechanicalcycles ≥ 3,000

D electric wear limit

However, it is recommendedto proceed with inspection of the pole or circuit--breakerused the most, then to adaptthe maintenance pro-gramme for the other brea-

kers depending on theresults observed.



Maintenance

Maintenance plan

L51--004EN/053/6


Maintenance operations

Guide The table below is a guide of the operations to be carried out at each

maintenance stage :

MAINTENANCE VISITS (1 or 2 times a year)

INSPECTION (every 5 years)

OVERHAUL (OPERATING TIME : 20 years)

OVERHAUL (MECHANICAL OPERATIONS : 3 000 cycles)

OVERHAUL (ELECTRICAL WEAR : see “Electrical wearlimits”)

J J J J J Operation counter reading.

J J J

Overall inspection : appearance (corrosion, paintwork,signs of overheating).

J J J J J Check operation of permanent heating. Check condition

of air vents.

J J J

If the circuit--breaker is fitted with an SF6 dial densimeteror a pressure gauge, check SF6 pressure (or SF6+CF4gas mixture).

J

It is advisable to perform at least 2 CO duty cycles peryear, when apparatus are scarcely used, in order tocheck that circuit--breaker and associated control circuitsare working properly.

J J Check SF6 densimeter thresholds. Then adjust pressure

to its rated value.

J J J Check tightening of parts not subjected to pressure

(frame -- deck -- cubicle).

∗ J J J Check tightening of low voltage terminals (∗ 6 months

after commissioning).

J J J Check relay operation.

J Change door seal, side panels seal and roof seal.

J J J J Measure operating times for poles and auxiliary contacts.

J J J J Carry out operations at recommended duties and rated

voltage.

J J Change (or recondition) interrupting chambers.

J Check that the damper piston for the opening of thecontrol presents no oil leak.



Maintenance

Maintenance plan

L51--004EN/054/6


Detail of maintenance operations

Caution DURING MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS ALL POSSIBLE SAFETY

PRECAUTIONS SHOULD BE TAKEN TO PROTECT PERSONNELWORKING ON THE EQUIPMENT.(Disconnect CB from HV system, remove LV supplies etc.)

General conditionof the apparatus

The apparatus should be subjected to visual inspection. If patches of corrosion are found begin reconditioning of the affected parts.The table below gives the process respecting surface finish and protection :

Support Inspection Action

Galvanizedsteel

Oxidized parts

D Thorough brushing of oxidizedparts.

D Degreasing with solvent.

D Application of a coat of zincpaint.

Paintedgalvanized

steelor

painted

aluminiumalloy

Light scratches

D Thorough degreasing withsolvent.

D Application of a coat of lacquerusing a brush.

Deep scratches

or flaking

D Scouring of paint surface withemery paper 400.

D Thorough degreasing withsolvent.

D Application of a coat of primer,then drying for 24 h.

D Application of a coat of polyurethane lacquer using abrush.

Products used :

D RUMCOAT EEVA primer by DERIVERY ref. 333103.

D Polyurethane lacquer 780 by DERIVERY, ref. depending on color of equipment.




Maintenance

Maintenance plan

L51--004EN/055/6


Detail of maintenance operations, continued

SF6 pressure gas For a circuit--breaker equipped with a ”dial--type” SF6 gas densimeter, check

the position of the needle.

Needle position Colored area Direction

GREEN None

YELLOW Perform a topping--up

operation.

RED

Abnormally low density,find the origin of the

leak and contactALSTOM Grid

After--sales Service.

NOTE : If the intersection is in either the yellow or red zone, withoutany particular indication from the electrical contact densimeter, verifythe concordance of different information sources to find the defectiveelement and then replace it.

Operating device Air--vents should be clean, free of dust and unobstructed. If necessary cleanusing a solvent.Make sure that the permanent resistors areworking properly by checking thatthese give off heat and that there are no overheating marks (a zone notoriousfor this).

For thermally controlled resistors, check that energizing and de--energizingtakes place correctly at voltage supply terminals by means of a thermostat(recommended thermostat temperature : +5°C).If necessary, change resistors found to be defective.For the opening damper, if any leak is observed, please contact

ALSTOM Grid, After--Sales Department, to proceed with any changes

Operation counter Read indications given by the counter(s) and note these on the inspectionsheet ”Maintenance visits”.The number of circuit--breaker operations recorded influences futuremaintenance operations.




Maintenance

Maintenance plan

L51--004EN/056/6


Detail of maintenance operations, continued

Electrical densimeter

thresholds

Check the electrical contact SF6 densimeter thresholds.

If the values found are outside required tolerances replace the densimeter.

Tightening ofmountings

Check and adjust, with a torque wrench, the tightening torques of screws onsub--assemblies not subjected to gas pressure. The tightening torques aregiven in paragraph ”Tightening torques”.

Relay operation Check relay operation by executing the following circuit--breakersequences :

-- closing lock--out,

-- automatic opening (where applicable),

-- anti--pumping.

TighteningLV terminals

With the electric cubicle out of service, check that the connectors and tips of conductors are tightened correctly and check the torque of connectionmountings.Tool used : 4 mm diameter screw driver , for terminals of the ”Entrelec” type(for example).

CAUTION : SCREWS ON TERMINALS MUST NOT BEOVER--TIGHTENED.

Insulating envelopes Check the condition of insulating envelopes, these should be free from impactmarks, splintering, cracks, dust deposits, pollution etc...If necessary, clean these using a dry rag.If anomalies are found contact :

ALSTOM Grid, After--sales Service in order to change the defective parts.

Interruptingchambers

Check the condition of interrupting chambers. This operation necessitatescomplete dismantling of the interrupting chamber to gain access to theelements to be inspected and should obligatorily be performed by ALSTOMGrid, After--sales Service -- to be contacted before all operations of this kind,

preferably at the maintenance planning stage.



Maintenance

Electrical wear limits

L51--053EN/031/2



Estimation Electrical wear can be determined by means of the curve below. This

curve corresponds with the formula :

ΣNI2 = 28,000 kA2 (*)N = number of interruptions on value I.

Example : it is possible to perform 70 interruptions on a current of 20 kA.

(*) Normal guarantee. In certain special operation conditions, other valuesmay be guaranteed.

Diagram

10 20 30 50 100 500 1000 3000

2

10

20

63

I (kA)

Number of interruptions



Maintenance


L51--053EN/032/2





Maintenance

Electrical contact densimeter threshold inspection

L51--108EN/051/8


Presentation

Necessary tools List of the ALSTOM Grid tools necessary for the operation :

Mark Diagram Designation Reference Number

(11)

Gauge0...0,765 MPa

HBL--02842117+

HB00054990011

Gauge0...1 MPa

HBL--02842118+

HB0005499001

(17) Pressure reducer

0...1 MPa

HBL--02557392+

HBLN551616011

(5) Connection valve

block HB0005649001 1

Set of seals HB0000270121 1

Test lamp HBL--02861501 1


Topic Page

Preparing the densimeter 2

Linking the densimeter on the control tool 3

Densimeter threshold inspection 4

Replacing the densimeter 6Putting away the control tool 7

Particular case with two (2) densimeters 8



Maintenance


L51--108EN/052/8


Preparing the densimeter

Introduction The densimeter is located at the base of the pole of the circuit--breaker, and

is joined to the SF6 (or SF6+CF4) gas volume of the circuit--breaker.To realize the electrical contact densimeter threshold inspection, it isimperative to isolate the densimeter volume from the pole SF6 (or SF6+CF4)gas volume.

Process The table below gives the process to preparing the densimeter :

Step Action Diagram

1 Remove the densimeter(1), held in place byscrews (8), on the

housing cover (2) of thecircuit--breaker.

x 3

8

H M6--20 2

1

2 Remove the screws (14). x 3

14

H M6--20

3 Install the seal (16) ontheconnection valve block(5).

16

5

4 Install the connectionvalve block (5) on thehousing cover (2), of thecircuit--breaker, usingscrews (8).

2 5

1

x 3

14

H M6--200,7 daN.m

x 3

8

H M6--200,7 daN.m

5 Install the densimeter (1)on the connection valveblock (5) using screws(14).

NOTE : Before instal-ling, check the pre-sence of seals on thedensimeter.



Maintenance


L51--108EN/053/8


Linking the densimeter on the control tool

Process The table below gives the process to link the densimeter on the control

tool :

Step Action Diagram

1 Check that the“REGULATION” screw(20) -- of the gauge (11) --is in “valve closed”position (screwed).

11

20

2 Connect the pipe (12) of the gauge (11) on thevalve (24) of theconnection valve block(5).

5

24

11

12

12

3 Briefly open the SF6 gasbottle tap (21) and thecock (22) of the pressurereducer to eliminate anyair inside the pipe (23)(approx. 20 s at lowflow--rate).Connect the pipe (23) onthe valve (10) of thegauge (11).

SF6

21

22

23

10

11



Maintenance


L51--108EN/054/8


Densimeter threshold inspection

SF6 gas pressure

adjustment

The table below gives the steps of SF6 gas pressure adjustment of the

connection valve block (5) :

Step Action Comment

1 Open the SF6 gas bottle tap (21)and adjust gas output by acting onthe cock (22) of the pressurereducer (reduced flow rate).Close the tap (21) from time totime to check pressure on thegauge (11).

See the module “Calculatioof the SF6 gas fillinpressure to using thpressure gauge (tool)”.

2 Start filling again until the requiredpressure is reached.

3 Close in this order : the tap (21),then the cock (22).

21

Open

Closed22

SF6

11




Maintenance


L51--108EN/055/8


Densimeter threshold inspection, continued

Testing The table below gives the steps of densimeter testing :

Step Action Comment

1 Connect a test lamp to the“Alarm pressure for theinsulation” pae densimeterthreshold.

Connection to the terminal block of the operating mechanism inaccordance with the electricaldiagram.

2 Calculate the effectivepressure at which the “Alarmpressure for theinsulation” pae contactswitches over -- corrected inkeeping with temperature and

local atmospheric pressure.

Value pae : see technicalcharacteristics).

See the module “Calculation ofthe SF6 gas filling pressure tousing the pressure gauge

(tool)”.3 D Create a leak by

unscrewing the“REGULATION” screw (20) --of the gauge (11) --, makingsure that the contact switchesover at the previouslycalculated value.

D Proceed in the same wayto check the contact of “Minimal pressure for theinsulation” pme.

11

20

If one of the thresholds does notcomply with the specified value,replace the densimeter.



Maintenance


L51--108EN/056/8


Replacing the densimeter

Process The table below gives the process to replace the densimeter :

Step Action Diagram

1 Disconnect the pipe (12)from the valve (24) of theconnection valve block (5).Screw the valve--cap (25) onthe valve (24).

25

12

5

24

2 Remove the densimeter (1),held in place by screws (14),on the connection valveblock (5).

x 3

14

H M6--20

5

1

3 Remove the connectionvalve block (5), held in placeby screws (8), on thehousing

cover (2) of thecircuit--breaker.

NOTE : If the connectionvalve block (5) is anymore used, see the nextparagraph “Putting awaythe control tool”.

x 3

8

H M6--20

2

5

4 Install new seals (26) and(27) on the densimeter (1),referring to “Preparing andinstalling static seals” in

”Erection generalprocedures”.Install the densimeter (1) onthe housing cover (2), of thecircuit--breaker, usingscrews (8).

x 3

8

H M6--200,7 daN.m

26

1

2

27



Maintenance


L51--108EN/057/8


Putting away the control tool

Process The table below gives the steps of putting away the control tool :

Step Action Diagram

1 Take precautions toremove the seal (16) fromthe connection valve block(5) and put it away into the“SET OF SEALS” box of the densimeter thresholdinspection case.

16

5

2 Install screws (14) on theconnection valve block (5)Put away the connectionvalve block (5) into thecase.

x 3

14

H M6--20

5

3 Disconnect the pipe (23)from the valve (10) of thegauge (11).

SF6

10

11

23



Maintenance


L51--108EN/058/8


Special case with two densimeters

Instructions If the apparatus is equipped with a second densimeter, repeat the

operations on pages two to seven.



Maintenance

Intervention on the FK3--5 operating device

L51--304EN/041/10


Presentation

Warning BEFORE ALL INTERVENTION ON THE OPERATING DEVICE, MAKE

SURETHATTHE CIRCUIT--BREAKERIS OPENAND ITS POSITIONINDI-CATOR IS IN THE POSITION BELOW.


Closing springReleased

NEVER WORK THE OPERATING DEVICE WHENTHIS IS NOTCOUPLED

TO THE CIRCUIT--BREAKER.


Topic Page

Positions of optical signalization 2

Safety measures 3

Preparing the operating device 4

Replacing an opening or closing electro-- magnet 5

Resumption of service 6

Lubrication 8

Cleaning the windows 9



Maintenance


L51--304EN/042/10


Positions of optical signalization

“A” position


Closing springLoaded

“B” position

Circuit--breakerClosed


“C” position

Circuit--breakerClosed


“D” position





Maintenance


L51--304EN/043/10


Safety measures

Circuit--breaker

general preparing

Thetablebelow gives the steps to prepare the circuit--breaker to work safely :

Step Action Comment

1 Isolate the circuit--breaker fromthe network.

Shut down the circuit--breaker,de--energize and earth it.

2 Switch--off the supply circuit of the reloading motor.

3 Check the SF6 pressure gas. Make sure that the SF6 pressuregas is ≥ pme.Below this level, no mechanicaloperating is allowed.

Release the springs The table below gives the procedure to release the closing spring and theopening spring depending the circuit--breaker state :

If the circuit--breakerposition is ...

Action

Closed

In the operating device, activate theopening handle and the closing han-dle like below :

1 -- Open

2 -- Close

3 -- Open

Open

Activate the closing handle and theopening handle like below :

1 -- Close

2 -- Open

Check the opticalsignalization

Check that the operating mechanism’s optical signalization shows the sym-bols below :





Maintenance


L51--304EN/044/10



Introduction In order to perform certain maintenance operations inside the operating de-

vice it is necessary to remove some cabinet parts.

Removingside panels

The table below gives the steps of side panels removing :

Step Action Diagram

1 Remove the nuts (2) fromthe left side panel (3).

x 2

M8

2

3

2 Take hold of the left sidepanel (3) from underneath,pull slightlytowards the out-side, thendownwards to re-

move it.

3

3 Proceed in the same wayfor the right side panel.



Maintenance


L51--304EN/045/10


Replacing an opening or closing electro --magnet

Process The table below gives the steps of replacing an opening or closing electro---

magnet :

Step Action Diagram

1 Disconnect the supply wires fromthe coil (9). 10

10

11

9

9

2 Extract the blade spring (10) bypressing outwards on the rivet witha finger.

3 Remove the core (11).

4 Remove the faulty coilandreplaceit by a new one carrying the samereference.

5 Reinstall the core (11).

6 Reinstall the blade spring (10).

7 Connect supply wires to the new

coil (9).



Maintenance


L51--304EN/046/10


Resumption of service

Installing the side

panels

Insert the side panel (3) under the edge of the roof plate (4). Press it down to

insert the mounting screws and fasten using new nuts (2).

M81,6 daN.m

2

x 2

3

4




Maintenance


L51--304EN/047/10


Resumption of service, continued

Energizing The table below gives the resumption of service steps of the circuit--breaker

pole :

Step Action Comment

1 Re--energize the closing andopening circuits.

2 Switch--on the motor supply cir-cuit.

The motor starts--up and re-loads the closing spring.

Check the opticalsignalization

Check that the operating mechanism’s optical signalization shows the sym-bols below :



Conclusion The circuit--breaker is ready for normal use.



Maintenance


L51--304EN/048/10


Lubrication

Principle No future lubrication will be necessary. The bearings and rollers have been

lubricated in our workshops with special grease :ASEOL SYLITEA 4--018

This grease can easily endure very low temperatures and has an excellentresistance to ageing. So that its qualities are not modified during use, it ispro-hibited to :

D Mix this grease with any other lubricant.

D Lubricate later with any other oil.

D Spray parts of the apparatus with a protective liquid against corrosion orwith any kind of lubricating oil.

Mixture with other lubricants can cause the layer of grease to become toohard.



Maintenance


L51--304EN/049/10


Cleaning the windows

Recommended

product

To clean the windows, use exclusively soapy water.

DO NOT USE SCOURING PAD.



Maintenance


L51--304EN/0410/10





Annexes

Tooling and accessories

L60--028EN/021/8


GRID

Presentation

Introduction Special tooling is necessary for : commissioning, maintenance of the circuit--breaker.

Only the tools and accessories specified on ordering are delivered.Commercially available tools (e.g. : spanners, torque wrenches, spiritlevels...) are not supplied.


Topic Page

Special tools 2

Accessories 6



Annexes


L60--028EN/022/8


GRID

Special tools

Table of special

tools

The table below gives the ALSTOM special tools (SF6 case) :

NUMBER DESIGNATION USE

HBLD001875..

EMPTYTRANSPORT

CASE(OPTIONAL)

Transport of SF6 gasfilling tools and

control tools.Inspection of densimeterthresholds.

HBLN55000401

FILLING TOOL SF6 filling,

topping--up.

HBL--02842117+

HB0005499001

PRESSUREGAUGE

0...0,765 MPaSF6 filling,

topping--up.Inspection of densimeterthresholds.

HBL--02842118+

HB0005499001

PRESSUREGAUGE

0...1 MPa

HBL465059004

WATERPRESSURE

GAUGE(OPTIONAL)

Checking for leaks

HBL--02557392+

HBLN55161601

PRESSUREREDUCER0...1 MPa

SF6 filling,topping--up.

Inspection of densimeterthresholds.

HB0005649001

CONNECTIONVALVE BLOCK


HB0000270121

SET OF SEALSInspection of densimeterthresholds.




Annexes


L60--028EN/023/8


GRID

Special tools, continued

Table of special

tools, continued

The table below gives the continuation of ALSTOM special tools :


HB0001652002

(x4/station)

LIFTING STRAP(3m)

Handling of the pole.

HB0001652001

(x4/station)

LIFTING STRAP(6m)


HBL--02236071

(x4/station)

LIFTINGSHACKLE


HBLD00786901

(x8/station)WASHER

Handlingof the column.

HBLN55069303

(x4/station)RING BOLT

Handlingof the column.

HB0004570001

(x1/poleinstalled in

factory)

BLOCKING TOOL

Blocking tool of thepole operating shaftfor replacing theoperating device.

HB0000482002

(x1/station)

CENTRINGSPINDLES

Chambers/columncoupling.




Annexes


L60--028EN/024/8


GRID


Table of special

tools, continued



HB0015532001

(x1/station)STOP


HB0000571001

(x1/station)LEVER

Installing theoperating device.

HB0000504001

(x1/station)PROTECTION


HB0015511001

(x1/station)COUPLING PIN


HBLN55001903

VACUUM PUMP110/220V

50 Hz (4,5 m3 /h)

Vacuum operationin pole.

HBLN55001904

VACUUM PUMP115/230V

60 Hz (4,5 m3 /h)




Annexes


L60--028EN/025/8


GRID


Table of special

tools, continued



HBLN55000406

UNIVERSALCONNECTION

1/2” GAZ AND

1/2” NPT

Vacuum operationin pole.

HBLD00001901

LEAK DETECTOR

Checkinggas--tightness of SF6

filling plug. SF6 leakdetection.

HBL--02861501

TEST LAMP


Inspection of interruption contact

wear.

HB0005220001FK3--2

CRANK HANDLE Spring reloading.HB0006053007

FK3--4 / FK3--5



Annexes


L60--028EN/026/8


GRID

Accessories

Table of accessories The table below gives the ALSTOM accessories :


HBL--01861432

42 kg

SF6 BOTTLE SF6 filling topping--up.

HBL--01861435

23 kg


HBL--01861434

10 kgSF6 BOTTLE SF6 filling topping--up.

HBL--01861443

8 kg


HBL--01861455

32 kg

CF4 BOTTLE CF4 filling

topping--up.

HBL--01861454

14 kg

CF4 BOTTLE CF4 filling

topping--up.

HBL--01818336 LOCTITE 262

(50 ml) Screw locking.

HBL--01818327 LOCTITE 225

(250 ml) Screw sealing.

HBL--01835265 MOLYKOTE 111

GREASEPreparationof SF6 seals.

HBL--01835203 GREASE

MOBILUX EP3

Lubricating screwsbefore tightening

to torques.




Annexes


L60--028EN/027/8


GRID

Accessories, continued

Table of accessories,

continued

The table below gives the continuation of ALSTOM accessories :


HBL--01835106 VASELINE

(80 g)

Preparation of electrical contact

surfaces.

HBL--01835118 CONTACTAL

GREASE


surfaces.

HBL--01835251 GREASE

ASEOL General lubrication.

HBL--02212337 SCOTCH BRITE

A -- VF


surfaces.

HBL--01831320

ABRASIVE

PAPER A 400

Preparation of

electrical contactsurfaces.

HBL--02212334 RAGPreparation of

electrical contactsurfaces.

HBL--02211842 ROUND BRUSH

Nº4


surfaces.

HBL--02211831 BRUSH

Nº16


surfaces.

HBL--01861262CAN OF

ISOPROPANOL(1 l)

Preparation of SF6seals.



Annexes


L60--028EN/028/8


GRID




GRIDHigh Voltage Switchgear

PS 0000EN 04 G. BERNARD 1998-08-12 J . VIAT 2001-03-21 1 / 1

Sheet N° Revision Written by Date Signature Approved by Date Signature Page

S U M M A R Y

of PRODUCT SAFETY SHEETS

for equipment* manufactured by

ALSTOM GRID - AHT

SUBJECT Reference N° Revision Remarks

Summary PS 0000EN 04

Working environment PS 0001EN 03

Handling Operations PS 0002EN 03

Pressurized Equipment PS 0003EN 03

SF6 : Use and Handling. PS 0004EN 03 Not applicable to pneumatically

operated circuit breakers

Chemicals PS 0005EN 03

Elec trical Equipment PS 0006EN 03

Machinery PS 0007EN 04

Operation PS 0008EN 04

Maintenance PS 0009EN 04

* : excluding lightning arresters.



GRID

High Voltage Switchgear







SAFETY SHEET

WORKING

ENVIRONMENT

CAUSE OR ORIGIN OF HAZARD.

Any negligence as regards site organisation may cause an accident.

WORK REQUIREMENTS.

All remedial action, for all life-cycles of the equipment, must be carried out in a safe working

environment.

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

OBSERVE ALL GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS GOVERNING INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND

OPERATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH CURRENTLY ACCEPTED PRACTICES AS WELL AS THOSE LAID

DOWN IN THE DOCUMENTATION SUPPLIED WITH THE EQUIPMENT.



GRID


PS 0001EN 03 1996-03-18 2011-03-21 2 / 2

Sheet N° Revision 1st issue Revision date Page

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

P A C K I N G

T R A N S P O R T

I N S T A L L A T I O

N

S T A R T - U P

O P E R A T I O N

M A I N T E N A N C E

S C R A P P I N G

&

R E C Y C L I N G

1 Personnel :

- Appropriate clothing, gloves, helmet, safety

boots, harness, etc..

- The personnel concerned must be familiar with

the basic working regulations governing a givenwork station: mechanical, dielectric, pressure

hazards, etc..

X X X X X X X

2 Handling Equipment :

- This must be in good working order, regularly

maintained, properly adjusted and compliantwith the standards in force in the country of use.

X X X X X X X

3 Tools in General :

- Only use tools appropriate to the type of work tobe carried out.

X X X X X

4 Working Area :

- Make sure the floor is safe (free from oil, bluntobjects, etc.).

- The site must be properly demarcated and kept

clear.

X X X X X




PS 0002EN 03 1996-03-18 2011-03-21 1 / 3


SAFETY SHEET

HANDLING OPERATIONS


Any handling operation may involve danger : - for the personnel,

- for the equipment being handled,

- for the installations or equipment in the vicinity.

WORK REQUIREMENTS.

As a general rule, handling operations must be carried out by personnel familiar with the basic

handling regulations, using equipment in good working order, and wearing the appropriate

protective clothing or equipment.

Ensure that the condition of the cases is such that they can be safely handled (state of the wood,

shock-resistance, etc.).



OPERATION IN ACCORDANC E WITH CURRENTLY ACCEPTED PRACTICES AS WELL AS THOSE LAID




GRID


PS 0002EN 03 1996-03-18 2011-03-21 2 / 3


SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

P A C K I N G

T R A N S P O R T

I N S T A L L A T I O N

S T A R T - U P

O P E R A T I O N


S C R A P P I N G &

R E C Y C L I N G

Handling operations must be carried out by personnel

familiar with the basic handling regulations.X X X X X X X

Personnel must be qualified to operate liftingequipment, cranes, overhead conveyors, etc..

X X X X X X X

Equipment in proper working order :

- Equipment must be checked and maintained

regularly in accordance with local regulations.

- All equipment must be properly housed.

X X X X X X X

Familiarity with the load to be handled (see details on

the case).X X X X X X X

Use of the appropriate handling equipment :

- Type of sling(s),

- Correct slinging methods,

- Use of special ALSTOM handling equipment.

X X X X X X X

Follow the handling instructions on :

- the cases (pictorial symbols: centre of gravity,

slinging points, etc.),

- the assembly instructions.

X X X

Compliance with the relevant work station safety

instructions (proximity of electrica l equipment).X X X X X X

Operator Safety :

- use of gloves, helmets, safety boots, etc .,

- loads not to be carried with personnel underneath.

X X X X X X X




PS 0002EN 03 1996-03-18 2011-03-21 3 / 3


SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

P A C K I N G

T R A N S P O R T


S T A R T - U P

O P E R A T I O N


S C R A P P I N G &

R E C Y C L I N G

Handling of insulating jac kets at transport pressure (300

hPa maximum). X X X

Ensure that cases have not been damaged during

handling or prolonged storage.X

Follow the stac king instructions. X X X

It is essential to open cases from the top and to takecare when unpacking.

X

Before handling any hydraulically operated

component, bring oil pressure back to atmospheric

pressure.

X X

Before handling any mechanically operated

component, disable the springs.X X

Bring insulating jacket working pressure back to

transport pressure (300 hPa maximum).X X



GRID








SAFETY SHEET

PRESSURIZED EQUIPMENT


Our equipment includes gas pressure assemblies (SF6, nitrogen, a ir, etc .) or fluids (oil).

WORK REQUIREMENTS.

• Comply with the storage, transport and operating instructions supplied with our equipment.

• Before initial filling and pressurizing, check the overall condition of the shielding conc erned :

- no signs of impact, splitting or chipping on the porcelain components, etc.,

- no visible damage to hoses and/ or rigid pipes (cuts, folds, corrosion, etc .) or to fittings and

metal protection (accumulators, tank, etc.).





As a general rule, all work on pressurized equipment must be carried out by qualified personnel.




PS 0003EN 03 1996-03-18 2011-03-21 2 / 3


SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

P A C K I N G

T R A N S P O R T


S T A R T - U P

O P E R A T I O N


S C R A P P I N G &

R E C Y C L I N G

1 Pressurized Equipment : General.

1.1 Comply with the assembly instructions shown

on both our equipment and the gas bottles.X X X X X X X

1.2 Before starting work on any pressurized piece

of equipment, make sure there is no pressure.X X X X

1.3 Before any handling, check to see how the

equipment is fixed to its frame and how the

frame is itself anchored.

X X X X

1.4 High-pressure pipes must be fixed or otherwise

made safe.X X X X

1.5 Before initial pressurization, check that allcircuits are properly sealed.

X X X X

1.6 Never tighten a pressure fitting. X X X X

1.7 Ensure that for every bolted connection for a

volume under pressure there is an appropriate

and properly fastened bolt at each relevant

point.

X X

1.8 It is strictly forbidden to lift or otherwise move a

piece of equipment inflated to a pressure in

excess of 300 hPa of gas.

X X X X X

1.9 Before giving any orders to move equipment,

chec k visually or by ear that all the relevant

pipe fittings are tight.

X X X

1.10 Comply with the standard instructions

governing the use of compressed gas bottles

(e.g. keep the bottle away from any source of

heat).

X X X X X X X




PS 0003EN 03 1996-03-18 2011-03-21 3 / 3


SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

P A C K I N G

T R A N S P O R T


S T A R T - U P

O P E R A T I O N


S C R A P P I N G &

R E C Y C L I N G

2

SF6 Pressure Equipment.

2.1 See SF6 Safety Sheet.X

X

X

X

X X

X

2.2 An effec tive pressure of 300 hPa, used for the

transport and storage of our products, is not

regarded as a potential hazard.

X

X

X

X

X

2.3 Always fill the unit using the appropriate

equipment, which should include a safety

valve.

X X X

2.4 Do not inflate over and above the prescribed

pressure.X X X

2.5 It is strictly forbidden to release SF6 toatmosphere. All discharged gas must without

exception be recovered.

X X X X X

3 Hydraulic Equipment.

3.1 Circuit Purging.

This must be done under pressure. Use the

appropriate equipment.

X X

3.2 Hydraulic Control Unit.

The doors must be kept shut except when

control tests are being carried out.

X

X



GRID








SAFETY SHEET

SF6

Use and Handling


Sulphur hexafluoride (SF6) is a gas which in its basic state is colourless, odourless and tasteless. It is

not toxic, but it cannot sustain life. It is a heavy gas that is dispersed slowly into the atmosphere.

In its natural state, SF6 is delivered and stored in pressurized tanks (bottles or spheres) at a pressure

of approximately 20 bar at 20°C (in its liquid form) and complies with IEC standard 376.

However, under the effect of the electric arc, the SF6 molecules break up and the elements mostly

recombine during cooling either due to extinction of the arc or by regeneration caused by thepresence of active absorbent charges within the c ircuit breaker.

Various chemical reactions, associated with the volatilization of the materials in contact with the

electric arc, create either fluoridized or sulphurous secondary gas products or solid products in the

form of metallic fluoride powder ; or again, in the presence of traces of water or moisture,

hydrofluoric acid or sulphur dioxide.

In the life-cycle of the equipment, SF6 can be observed not only in its pure state, but also in its

contaminated state :

- the use of new SF6 for filling or adding,

- leaks under normal operating conditions,

- maintenance involving the opening of circuit breakers containing old SF6 (decomposition

products),

- abnormal conditions (internal arc fault causing the shielding to break),

- circuit breaker recycling on end of life-cycle.

WORK REQUIREMENTS.

Follow the instructions for the transport of pressurized containers.

The storage of these containers is governed by the same storage regulations as compressed gas

bottles :

- keep away from any source of heat and in a cool, dry and well-ventilated area,

- always fit a pressure reducing valve.



GRID


PS 0004EN 03 1996-03-18 2011-03-21 2 / 3


Whilst SF6 in its pure state is not toxic, the decomposition products have varying degrees of toxicity.

They may irritate the skin, the eyes and the mucous membranes; and in massive amounts may

cause serious lesions (oedema, heart failure, c irculatory disorders and unconsciousness).

However, very rapidly and before there is any real danger, signs such as a pungent smell, irritation

of the mucous of the nose, the eyes and the mouth will give a warning and the personnel

concerned will have sufficient time to take the necessary safety actions.

Where the gas is used or handled within enclosed premises, ensure adequate ventilation,especially low down.

If the gas is inhaled, the area concerned must be evacuated immediately.

Under normal operating conditions, leaks are exceptionally minor and not critical, even when the

gas contains impurities (due to the regenerating filters in the circuit breaker).

Filling and where necessary topping up operations must be carried out using the appropriate tools.

During maintenance operations, or at the end of the life-cycle, dust inside the equipment must beremoved by a vacuum extractor and the operator should wear a mask. Gas recovery must be

carried out using the appropriate gas recovery equipment.

Gases and decomposition products must be treated and/or disposed of by specialist organizations.

Under extremely abnormal conditions (e.g. break in the shielding) in an enc losed space, individual

protective equipment is recommended.

Lastly, it is forbidden to smoke, drink, eat or keep food in the vicinity of open SF6 equipment,

whether indoors or outside (harmful dust).





It is essential that both the fitter and the userread IEC Technical Report 1634 regarding the use andhandling of sulphur hexafluoride gas.




PS 0004EN 03 1996-03-18 2011-03-21 3 / 3


SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

P A C K I N G

T R A N S P O R T


S T A R T - U P

O P E R A T I O N


S C R A P P I N G &

R E C Y C L I N G

Transport of SF6 X X

Pure SF6 X X X X X

Contaminated SF6 X X X



GRID








SAFETY SHEET

CHEMICALS


Generally speaking, the products used for installation and commissioning are bought chemical

products, namely :

- Hydraulic oil - Grease - Loctite

- Touching-up paint - Isopropanol - Drying agents

These must be kept in their original packing and the tops replaced after use.

Some packing produc ts require careful handling as they may contain preservatives.

WORK REQUIREMENTS.

As a general rule, chemical products must be used and stored away from any source of heat.

Smoking is to be avoided.

Avoid contact with the skin and any splashes to the eyes.

Take the basic health and safety precautions.

Products and packing must be destroyed in accordanc e with local environmental regulations.





Other products: SF6 (see relevant sheet)



GRID


PS 0005EN 03 1996-03-18 2011-03-21 2 / 2


SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

P A C K I N G

T R A N S P O R T


N

S T A R T - U P

O P E R A T I O N


S C R A P P I N G

&

R E C Y C L I N G

Drying Agents X X X X X

Hydraulic Oil X X X X X X X

Consumables (Grease & Paint) (Isopropanol) X X X X X

Loctite X X






SAFETY SHEET

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT


Our equipment is subjected to high and low tension loads that could expose the personnel to the

risk of electrocution.

WORK REQUIREMENTS.

The operating company is responsible for ensuring compliance with the safety instructions

governing high tension.

The basic regulations in respec t of low tension installations must also be complied with.





All work on high-tension networks and low-tension installations must be performed by qualified

operators wearing personal protec tive clothing and using the appropriate tools and equipment.



GRID


PS 0006EN 03 1996-04-04 2011-03-21 2 / 2


SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

P A C K I N G

T R A N S P O R T


N

S T A R T - U P

O P E R A T I O N


S C R A P P I N G

&

R E C Y C L I N G

1 High Tension.

1.1 Comply with the regulations governing the work

station.X X X X X

1.2 In the case of items equipped with capac itors,

make sure they are discharged prior to removal

and short-circuited while work is being carried out.

X X

2 Low Tension.

2.1 Prior to any work on the low-tension c ircuit or

equipment, cut off the power supply.X X X X X

2.2 When replacing an electrical component on the

control equipment, follow the safety instructions

shown in the "Machinery" safety sheet.

X X






SAFETY SHEET

M A C H I N E R Y


Our equipment contains moving parts (linkage, levers, etc.), reserve power (springs, accumulators,

etc.) and pressurized sheathing ; the associated hazards are dealt with in safety sheet "Pressurized

Equipment" PS 0003/A.

WORK REQUIREMENTS.

Follow the relevant ALSTOM operating and maintenance instructions.

Prior to any work on the control equipment and the motion transfer mechanism, disable the springs

on mechanically operated units and bring pressure back to zero for hydraulically operated units.





As a general rule, work on the control equipment and transmissions must be performed by qualified

operators wearing personal protec tive clothing and using the appropriate tools and equipment.



GRID


PS 0007EN 04 1996-04-04 2011-03-21 2 / 2


SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

P A C K I N G

T R A N S P O R T


N

S T A R T - U P

O P E R A T I O N


S C R A P P I N G

&

R E C Y C L I N G

1 Moving Parts.

1.1 Before any work is carried out on transmission

components, ensure that the control equipmenthas been deactivated.

X X X X X

2

Spring-operated Mechanism.

2.1 Before any work is carried out, cut off all power to

the reset motor.X X X X X

2.2 Deactivate the opening and closing springs inaccordance with ALSTOM instructions.

X X X X X

2.3 Make sure that all safety rules are complied with

while the work is being carried out.X X X X X

3 Hydraulic Mechanism.

3.1 Before any work is carried out, cut off power to

the motor pump.X X X X X

3.2 Reduce the pressure of the hydraulic c ircuit to

zero.X X X X X






SAFETY SHEET

OPERATION


If the unit shows any sign of an unwanted condition, it must be examined by the user.

WORK REQUIREMENTS.

The operators concerned must be suitably qualified and must comply with the normal operating

and maintenance instructions issued by ALSTOM.

Depending on the severity of the fault observed, the necessary corrective measures must be taken,

e.g :

- replenish the SF6 gas in the event of a leak,

- isolate the system in the event of a major malfunction.







GRID


PS 0008EN 04 1996-03-18 2011-03-21 2 / 2


SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

P A C K I N G

T R A N S P O R T


N

S T A R T - U P

O P E R A T I O N


S C R A P P I N G

&

R E C Y C L I N G

Opening malfunction :

- to do with the sequencing chain,

- following a mechanical fault.

X X

Cut-off failure. X

External dielectric flash-over. X

SF6 pressure drop due to either :

- major leak (switch to 2nd threshold),

- no 1st threshold alarm complement.

X X

Loss of motor power :

- oil, compressed air, component failure.

X X

Activation of safety device, if fitted. X

Use only the appropriate products

recommended by ALSTOM.X X X X

C O M P L Y W I T H T H E S P E C I F I C I N S T R U C T I O N P R O V I D E D I N T H E F O L L O W I N G C A S E S :

Abnormal noise. X X






SAFETY SHEET

MAINTENANCE


• To ensure safe and unimpaired operation of the equipment, regular maintenance is essential.

Neglected maintenance can create hazards.

• Maintenance operations involve hazards that must be guarded against.

WORK REQUIREMENTS.

• Comply with the maintenance programme and service intervals shown in the ALSTOM manua ls.

• In addition, every maintenance operation must comply with the following requirements :

- it must be carried out by suitably qualified personnel,

- both the work involved and the assoc iated hazards must be clearly identified beforehand,

- the tools and equipment used (standard or specific to ALSTOM) must be appropriate and inproper working order,

- any replacement parts must be ALSTOM parts.





• Refer to the relevant SAFETY sheets.

• The safety instructions below are general and not exhaustive. They should therefore be

modified and/or supplemented for all specific maintenance operations to be carried out.



GRID


PS 0009EN 04 1996-03-18 2011-03-21 2 / 2


SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

P A C K I N G

T R A N S P O R T


N

S T A R T - U P

O P E R A T I O N


S C R A P P I N G

&

R E C Y C L I N G

Identify the equipment to be worked on and ensure itis switched off.

X X X

Obtain as much information as possible from the user

regarding the condition of the unit.X X X

Check that the unit is earthed both upstream and

downstream.X X X

Demarcate the work area. X X X

Ensure that the operator is equipped with the personal

protective clothes and equipment required (safety

glasses, gloves, safety boots, harness, etc.).X X X

Ensure that the equipment used is compliant and in

good condition (scaffolding, slings, suspended

platforms, electrical equipment, tools, etc.).

X X X

Ensure that the safety instructions in respec t of each

particular hazard are complied with.X X X



































58.020.034EN02--2004

GRID

Point --on--Wave Controller

Series RPH2

Service Manual



58.020.034EN02--2004

GRID




Page 1/73Issue 3 58.020.034 E

2004-02-12

Compiled: Approved: File code:

2004-02-12 2004-02-12THS/ U.Samitz VEV/ K. Bauer RPHDOC_E.DOC

RPH2 Service ManualCONTENTS

1. IN GENERAL 6

1.1. Handling of electronic equipment 6

1.2. Unpacking 6

1.3. Storage 6

1.4. Installation 6

1.5. Technical data 7

2. INTRODUCTION 8

2.1. Using the handbook 8

2.2. Models available, Assembly 8

2.3. Additional modules 8

2.3.1. Signal module: Option S 8

2.3.2. Current measurement module: Option I 9

2.3.3. Analogue module: Option A 9

2.3.3.1 Option A0 9

2.3.3.2 Option A1 10

2.3.3.3 Option A3 10

2.3.3.4 List of available models 10

2.4. Elements on the front of the device 10

2.4.1. Graphic display 10

2.4.1.1 Setting Contrast of LC-Display 102.4.2. Key-operated switch 11

2.4.2.1 Position "OFF" 11

2.4.2.2 Position "OPERATION" 11

2.4.3. LED indicators 11

2.4.3.1.LED "READY" (green) 11

2.4.3.2.LED 1 to 7 (red) 11

2.4.4. Keys 12

2.4.5. Serial interface 12

2.5. Menu system 12

2.5.1. Menu structure 14

3. APPLICATION NOTES 163.1. General Description of the Functions 16

3.1.1. Synchronized switching 16

3.1.1.1 Closing 16

3.1.1.2 Opening 17



Page 2Issue 3 58.020.034 E2004-02

3.1.2. Circuit breaker 17

3.1.3. RPH2 structure 17

3.1.4. Function of the RPH2 18

3.1.4.1 Energizing of an inductive load in the voltage maximum 18

3.1.4.2 Breaking of an inductive current 19

3.1.4.3 Switching program 20

3.2. Switching of Transformers and Reactors 203.2.1. Closing 21

3.2.1.1 Networks with grounded Neutral 21

3.2.1.2 Networks with isolated Neutral 21

3.2.2. Opening 21

3.2.3. Data on circuit breaker required 21

3.2.3.1 Closing 21

3.2.3.2 Opening 22

3.2.4. Necessary Switching Time Accuracy 22

3.3. Switching of Reactor Groups 22

3.3.1. Closing 22


3.3.1.2 Networks with isolated Neutral 22

3.3.2. Opening 223.3.3. Data on circuit breaker required 22

3.3.3.1 Closing 23

3.3.3.2 Opening 23

3.3.4. Necessary Switching Time Accuracy 23

3.4. Switching of unloaded Capacitors 23

3.4.1. Closing 23


3.4.1.2.Networks with isolated Neutral 23

3.4.2. Opening 24

3.4.3. Data on circuit breaker required 24

3.4.4 Necessary Switching Time Accuracy 27

3.5 Switching (closing) of uncharged Lines 28

4 FUNCTIONS OF THE ADDITIONAL MODULES 29

4.1 Signal Module: Option S 29

4.1.1 Alarm outputs 29

4.1.2 Opto coupler inputs 29

4.1.2.1 Measuring the operating time 29

4.1.2.2 Remote reset 31

4.1.2.3 Real time clock synchronization 31

4.2 Analogue Module: Option A 31

4.2.1 Control Voltage Compensation 32

4.2.2 Temperature Compensation 33

4.2.3 Hydraulic Pressure Compensation 354.2.4 Specifications for the external sensors 37

4.2.5 Adaptive Control 37

4.3 Current Module Option I 38

5 RPH2 MENUE SYSTEM 39



Page 3Issue 3 58.020.034 E

2004-02

5.1 System data 39

5.1.1 Password 39

5.1.2 System Frequency 39

5.1.3 Control Voltage 40

5.1.4 Rated Pressure 40

5.1.5 Switching Program 40

5.1.5.1 User Program 41

5.1.6 Function Channel 1 425.1.7 Language 42

5.1.8 Time / Date 42

5.1.9 New Password 42

5.1.10 Selftest Start 43

5.1.11 Selftest Interval 43

5.2 CB Data 44

5.2.1 Operating Time CH1 44

5.2.2 Operating Time CH2 44

5.2.3 Arcing Time CH1 44

5.2.4 Arcing Time CH2 45

5.2.5 Auxiliary Timeshift CH1 45

5.2.6 Auxiliary Timeshift CH2 45

5.2.7 Adaptive Control 455.2.7.1 Weighting Factor 46

5.2.7.2 Adaptive Times CH1 46

5.2.7.3 Adaptive Times CH2 46

5.2.7.4 Reset Adaptive Times 46

5.2.8 Compensation 46

5.2.9 kU1 Voltage CH1 46

5.2.10 kP1 Pressure CH1 47

5.2.11 Temperature Compensation CH1 47

5.2.12 Table Temp. CH1 47

5.2.12.1 Delta_t xx°C 47

5.2.13 kU2 Voltage CH2 48

5.2.14 kP2 Pressure CH2 48

5.2.15 Temperature Compensation CH2 48

5.2.16 Table Temp. CH1 485.2.16.1 Delta_t xx°C 48

5.3 Analogue Data 48

5.3.1 Thresholds 48

5.3.1.1 Current max. 48

5.3.1.2 Control Voltage max. 49

5.3.1.3 Control Voltage min. 49

5.3.1.4 Temperature max. 49

5.3.1.5 Temperature min. 50

5.3.1.6 Pressure max. 50

5.3.1.7 Pressure min. 50

5.3.2 CT Rated Current prim 51

5.3.3 CT Rated Current sec 51

5.3.4 Actual Control Voltage 525.3.5 Temperature 52

5.3.5.1 Value at 4 mA 52

5.3.5.2 Value at 20 mA 53



Page 4Issue 3 58.020.034 E2004-02

5.3.6 Pressure 53

5.3.6.1 Value at 4 mA 53

5.3.6.2 Value at 20 mA 54

5.4 Alarms 54

5.4.1 Reset Obligatory 54

5.4.2 Lock-Out 55

5.4.3 Alarm List 555.4.3.1 Lock-out 56

5.4.3.2 Frequency min 56

5.4.3.3 Frequency max. 56

5.4.3.4 Current max. (peak) 57

5.4.3.5 Reference Voltage Failure 57

5.4.3.6 RTC Impulse Failure 57

5.4.3.7 Neutral intermediate 57

5.4.3.8 Neutral grounded 57

5.4.3.9 Neutral isolated 57

5.4.3.10 Selftest ERROR 57

5.4.3.11 Selftest CH1 ERROR 57

5.4.3.12 Selftest CH2 ERROR 58

5.4.3.13 Command Time CH1 min 58

5.4.3.14 Command Time CH2 min 585.4.3.15 Operating Time min 58

5.4.3.16 Operating Time max. 58

5.4.3.17 Drive mech. Failure 59

5.4.3.18 Archive Full 59

5.4.3.19 Archive Failure 59

5.4.3.20 Control Voltage min 59

5.4.3.21 Control Voltage max. 59

5.4.3.22 Temperature min 59

5.4.3.23 Temperature max. 60

5.4.3.24 Temp. Transducer Fault 60

5.4.3.25 Pressure min 60

5.4.3.26 Pressure max. 60

5.4.3.27 Press. Transducer Fault 60

5.5 Measurement 60

5.5.1 Current Graphs 60

5.5.2 Measured Times 61

5.5.2.1 Command OUT 61

5.5.2.2 CB Signal received 61

5.5.2.3 Calculated Operating Time 62

5.5.2.4 Measured Operating Time 62

5.5.3 Frequency 62

5.5.4 Current (RMS) 63

5.5.5 Control Voltage 63

5.5.6 Actual Temperature 63

5.5.7 Temperature for Compensation 64

5.5.8 Additional Operating Times 64

5.5.8.1 Voltage CH1 645.5.8.2 Voltage CH2 64

5.5.8.3 Temperature CH1 65

5.5.8.4 Temperature CH2 65

5.5.8.5 Pressure CH1 65

5.5.8.6 Pressure CH2 65



Page 5Issue 3 58.020.034 E

2004-02

5.5.9 Pressure (L1/L2/L3) 66

5.5.10 Pressure (L1) 66

5.6 Auxiliary functions 66

5.6.1 Alarm Input 66

5.6.2 Alarm Output 67

5.6.3 Error Type 67

5.7 Switching archive 67

6 COMMISSIONING 68

6.1 Commissioning preliminaries 68

6.1.1 Settings 68

6.1.1.1 Factory Settings 68

6.1.1.2 Necessary Settings 68

6.1.2 Inspection 69

6.1.3 First operation 70



Page 6Issue 3 58.020.034 E2004-02

1. IN GENERAL

1.1. Handling of electronic equipment

A person can cause an electronic potential of many thousands of volts.

When this potential is discharged into appliances with semiconductor components,serious damage can occur which is not immediately evident, but can still impairoperational reliability.

The electronic switching circuit of the RPH2 Point-on-Wave Controller meets all therequirements concerning electromagnetic compatibility in accordance with theEN 50 081-1/1992 and EN 50 082-2/1995.

Care is necessary only if the plug-in unit is pulled out of the casing. Take care not totouch the plug contact on the back! For storing and transporting loose plug-in units, werecommend a conductive fail packaging.

As soon as the plug-in unit is properly installed in the casing, no safety measures are

necessary at all.

1.2. Unpacking

Despite the general robust construction of the Point-on-Wave Controller, it must behandled with care before installation. Before accepting the Point-on-Wave Controller itshould be checked for damage which could have originated during transportation. Ifyou have cause for complaint, please refer to the transport company and notify aperson responsible at ALSTOM Grid.

1.3. Storage

If the Point-on-Wave Controller is not to be installed immediately upon receipt, it shouldbe stored in a place which is free of dust and moisture, in its original packaging. If amoisture-absorption bag is in the packaging, leave it as it is. The effectiveness of thedrying agent is impaired if the non-protected bag is subjected to the surroundingconditions.Before the Point-on-Wave Controller is placed in the box again, warm the drying bagslightly in order to regenerate the drying agent.

Storage temperature: -40 °C to +70 °C

1.4. InstallationThe RPH2 Point-on-Wave Controller can either be installed in a switchboard or asuitable frame with the provided material (panel cut-out see diagram 58.001.115), or aspecial fitting is available for wall mounting (see diagram 58.001.116).



Page 7Issue 3 58.020.034 E

2004-02

We suggest the control room or the relays room as the most favourable installation site.Installation in a heated outdoor control cubicle is also possible. Installation directly inthe operating mechanism of a circuit breaker is not provided for (please contact ALSTOM Grid regarding this).The position should be well lit in order to make inspections easier.

Wiring is carried out according to the wiring diagram which is enclosed with every

Point-on-Wave Controller. Take care to earth the housing appropriately.

1.5. Technical data

supply voltage Nominal: 48 V - 250 VDC(= CB trip coil voltage): Operative range: 35 V - 300 VDCspecial power supply for 48 V -44 % ANSI-Standard availablepower consumption: < 20 W

reference voltage (L1/N): Nominal: 100/√3 V; 220/√3 V ACOperative range: 15 V -105 VAC; 30 V - 250 VAC

rated frequency: 16 2/3 / 50 / 60 Hz ±10 %power consumption of measuring inputs: < 2 VA

maximum permissible current of CB trip coil: 14.5 A/ phase for 1 sec.minimum command time: 100 mspolarity of command impulse: positiveresolution of time setting: 0.1 msaccuracy of switching times over

temperature range -55 °C to +55 °C ±0.3 ms

current inputs: 1 A and 5 Arated short time current: 100 x In / 1 s

accuracy of current measurement ±10% (0.5 In ... 4 In)

measurement control voltage internalinput temperature measurement: 4...20 mA of Pt 100input pressure measurement: 4...20 mA of pressure sensoraccuracy of measurement by RPH2:

control voltage ±3%

ambient temperature ±3%

hydraulic pressure ±3%

signalling inputs: potential free contacts required(e.g. CB or neutral ground disconnector position,CB aux. contacts, external reset)

indication outputs: potential free contactscontact rating 24-250 V AC/DC ± 25 %,

max. 70 VA/ max. 3 A

communication port: RS 232, DC decoupled



Page 8Issue 3 58.020.034 E2004-02

2. INTRODUCTION

2.1. Using the handbook

This handbook will guide the user through the setting-up procedure for the Point-on-

Wave Controller.It explains the additional functions of this appliance, and how they are selected andused. In addition, some examples of its usage are given, the theory behind it examinedand explained, and which circuit breaker and main data are absolutely necessary foroperation.The handbook shows the complete list of all menu points with cross-references to thechapter with the accompanying descriptions. The menu point order for the individualmodules is shown on this list as well.Notes on checking and commissioning are given in the last chapter.

2.2. Models available, Assembly

The RPH2 is available in 2 basic models:• RPH2-1xx: for one switching function (closing or opening alternatively)

• RPH2-2xx: for 2 switching functionschannel 1 for closing, channel 2 for opening(only when using the given switching programs)

The 7 alarm LED's are active, however there is only one alarm contact (Alarm 1)available. In addition, there is an alarm contact "Device not ready".

The RPH2 Point-on-Wave Controller is assembled in a modular system. The functioncan be extended through the combination of various modules. Extending the function ata later date is only possible by the manufacturer.

The casing is a standard 19 inch sub-rack, with half width for one device oralternatively with full width for 2 devices. After removing the 4 external screws of thefront panel, the plug-in unit on the grip rail can be removed from the housing. Safetynotes see 1.1.

2.3. Addit ional modules

2.3.1. Signal module: Option S

This module offers 6 alarm outputs (alarm 2 to alarm 7) and 6 optoelectronic couplerinputs. Inputs 1-3 serve as circuit breaker monitors via its auxiliary contacts. With this the

pole operating times can be measured. Resolution 0.5 ms.Input 4 serves as an input for a remote-reset. Inputs 5 and 6 are not in use at present. A further input is used for synchronizing with a radio clock. It can be switched in parallelwith other Point-on-Wave Controllers.



Page 9Issue 3 58.020.034 E

2004-02

2.3.2. Current measurement module: Option I

With this the phase currents during the switching process can be recorded andgraphically displayed. Data from the last 4 switching operations (curves, amplitudes) arestored in a non volatile memory and can be analysed on the display. Primary values areshown after feeding in the current transformer ratios.

2.3.3. Analogue module: Option AIndependent of the breaking system and the kind of operating mechanism, the operatingtimes of a circuit breaker change in dependence on certain service parameters:

With reduced control voltage at the circuit breaker coil there is less energy available tochange the electrical control commands into a mechanical action. The operating timeextends itself. (Valid for all types of operations.)

By altering the hydraulic pressure on hydraulic drives, the energy available to carry outthe switching movement changes.

The ambient temperature is the most complex parameter of influence. The electricalresistance of the trip coils, the oil viscosity and the pressure of the SF6 gas aredependent on the temperature. In addition, changes of length in the driving linkage andthe porcelains occur. All these parameters influence the operating time in different ways.

In the extreme, each of these 3 parameters can alter the operating time by somemilliseconds. The RPH2 with option A is in the position to compensate these operatingtime alterations.There are inputs available for the measurements acquired when measuring the controlvoltage, pressure and temperature for the compensation of pole operating times.

The control voltage is measured directly in the RPH2 at the input terminals for theauxiliary voltage. There are no external measuring devices necessary.For measuring pressure and temperature, external sensors with integrated transducer

banks (2 conductor constructions, auxiliary voltage 24 VDC) and standard output signal(4...20 mA) are necessary. The supply for the transducer bank is effected by the RPH2.Up to 8 RPH2's can be switched in parallel on one temperature sensor. When measuringpressure, an individual transducer is necessary for each circuit breaker (option A1) oreach circuit breaker pole (option A3). The measuring range of the measuringinstruments depends on the requirements and can be simply parameterized in theRPH2.

Three types of this additional module are available:

2.3.3.1. Option A0

Measuring and compensation of control voltage and temperature (for springloadeddrives)



Page 10Issue 3 58.020.034 E2004-02

2.3.3.2. Option A1

Same design as 2.3.3.1, however with additional measurement and compensation forhydraulic pressure (for hydraulic drives which have a mutual pressure generation for allthree poles).

2.3.3.3. Option A3

Like 2.3.3.2, however for circuit breakers which have pressure generation per pole.

2.3.3.4. List of available models

RPH2-1 RPH2-1S RPH2-1I RPH2-1A0 RPH2-1A1RPH2-2 RPH2-2S RPH2-2I RPH2-2A0 RPH2-2A1

RPH2-1A3 RPH2-1SI RPH2-1SA0 RPH2-1SA1 RPH2-1SA3RPH2-2A3 RPH2-2SI RPH2-2SA0 RPH2-2SA1 RPH2-2SA3

RPH2-1SIA0 RPH2-1SIA1 RPH2-1SIA3RPH2-2SIA0 RPH2-2SIA1 RPH2-2SIA3

2.4. Elements on the front of the device

The device identification is located on the right side of the grip rail. The top line showsthe model variation code and the serial number is located on the line beneath.

With any queries or questions please state both numbers.

2.4.1. Graphic display

To show the adjusted and measured values.The top line shows each active menu point. Underneath four menu lines appear. Thelast line (under the drawn line) is the status line. The feed in or measured values appearhere.

The digits which are pressed into the front panel underneath the display indicate thepositions for setting the alarms.

S y s t e m D a t a

> P a s s w o r dS y s t e m F r e q u e n c y

C o n t r o l V o l t a g e R a t e d P r e s s u r e

0 0 0 0

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3

2.4.1.1 Setting Contrast of LC-Display

Turn key-operated switch to „OFF“.Press the [Enter] button and hold it.Turn the key-operated switch to „OPERATION“.The contrast changes within its limits from dark to light.When the optimal contrast for your requirements is reached, release the [Enter] button.



Page 11Issue 3 58.020.034 E

2004-02

Note: The whole contrast-range of the display is adjustable. Therefore the displaybecomes nearly transparent or dark respectively for a moment. The selected contrast isstored in a non-volatile memory.

2.4.2. Key-operated switch

2.4.2.1. Position "OFF"The RPH2 is blocked. No switching operation is possible. The green LED "READY" isextinguished and the alarm contact "Device not Ready" (-X6: 12/13) closes.

2.4.2.2. Position "OPERATION"

After switching to this position the device carries out an internal test. After the averagingof the analogue measured values (pressure, temperature, control voltage) is completed(it takes approx. 20 sec.) and no failure is present, the device switches to "OPERATION"and the green LED "READY" lights up. The alarm contact "Device not ready" (-X6:12/13) opens.

2.4.3. LED indicators

2.4.3.1.LED "READY" (green)

Status FunctionSteady light The device is ready for operation

Dark Key-operated switch in "OFF" position Averaging of analogue measured values is still notcompleted (see 1.2) Voltage reference is missing or

frequency is not in the permitted range (±10 %)The device has identified an internal failure.

Blinking The password is activated, the device can beparameterized. All functions are active.

2.4.3.2.LED 1 to 7 (red)

To show the parameterized alarms. The LED's are assigned to the alarm relays 1 to 7.Next to the LED's is a window in which the user's message texts can be placed. For awithdrawn cassette, the input tag with the texts is inserted from the top behind the front. As insert use a sheet of paper 41 mm x 90 mm.

Status FunctionSteady light An alarm has occurred. The LED remains alight until

the alarm is active (regardless of whether the "Quitt"button has been pressed). As long as the LED isalight, the affiliated output relay is also activated.



Page 12Issue 3 58.020.034 E2004-02

Status FunctionBlinking An alarm has occurred which is marked as „Rest

obligatory“ After pressing the "Quitt" button two possibilities arise:

1) The LED extinguishes, i.e. the alarm was no longeractive when reseted, the output relay is released.

2) The indicator switches over to permanent light, i.e.the alarm is still active, the output relay remainsenergized.

As long as the LED is alight or blinks, the affiliated output relay is energized.

2.4.4. Keys

[Enter] Menu point open / confirm

[+] Cursor up / increase value

[-] Cursor down / decrease value

[Esc] Leave menu point / break-off action

[Quitt] Acknowledge alarm / alter current scale (together with [+] or [-])

2.4.5. Serial interface

To connect the RPH2 to a computer via a standard interface cable.Pinning of connection cable (Nullmodem Cable):

2.5. Menu system

The user surface is organized in several master menu points, each with linked sub-menu points. For their part, the sub-menus can contain further sub-menus. The last line(under the drawn line) is the status line. Adjusted or measured values are shown here.The menu structure depends on the RPH2 configuration, e.g. with a device without acurrent measuring module (option I) menu points are not available which are connectedwith his function. There are menu cells which can only be read and others where analteration to the setting can be carried out.

Changes are only possible after the password has been activated.

After feeding the auxiliary voltage, the first four lines of the master menu (1st plane)appear on the display. Move the menu cursor (black triangle on the left side of thedisplay) up and down using the [+] an[-] keys. The first four lines of the 2nd plane areshown after pressing [Enter]. Analogues are also valid for the 3rd plane. The menu

1 1

PC Serial Port RPH2 Serial Port

25 pin plug 9 pin plug

:

1 1

PC Serial Port RPH2 Serial Port

9 pin plug 9 pin plug



Page 13Issue 3 58.020.034 E

2004-02

cursor is moved again using [+] or [-]. The contents of the cells are shown in the statusline. If a value is to be altered, move the menu cursor to the desired plane and line. After pressing [Enter], a blinking cursor appears under the first status line position.Change this position using [+] or [-]. [Enter] moves the cursor right to the next position.

With [Esc] the input mode can be left at any time without storing the changes made.

After feeding in the last position the message

Accept: YES - NO

appears in the status line.

The input is confirmed with [Enter]. The new value is stored and the menu cursorappears. [Esc] enables the input procedure to be repeated.

Af ter complet ing the input , turn the key-operated swi tch to " OFF" and then to"OPERATION" or start the selftest v ia the menu. After the selftest the data in thesystem is accepted.The following pages show a list of all the available menu points. The cross-referencesto the chapter with the detailed function description are in the column "Chapt.".The column "Module" shows with which model variation this menu is available.The following coding system applies:

-1 RPH2 with one switching function-2 RPH2 with two switching functions Ax Analogue module in all models with module A A1 Analogue module, e.g. Option 1I Current measuring module Option IS Signal module Option S

Menu points without a particular task are available on all models.



Page 14Issue 3 58.020.034 E2004-02

2.5.1. Menu structure

Chapter Module Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

5.1 System Data

5.1.1 Password

5.1.2 System Frequency

5.1.3 Ax Control Voltage5.1.4 Ax Rated Pressure

5.1.5. Switching Program

5.1.5.1 User Program

5.1.6 -1 Function CH1

5.1.7 Language

5.1.8 Time/Date

5.1.9 New Password

5.1.10 Selftest Start

5.1.11 Selftest Interval

5.2 CB Data

5.2.1 Operating Time CH1

5.2.2 Operating Time CH25.2.3 Arcing Time CH1

5.2.4 Arcing Time CH2

5.2.5 S Aux.Timeshift CH1

5.2.6 S Aux.Timeshift CH2

5.2.7 SAx Adaptive Control ->

5.2.7.1 SAx Weighting Factor

5.2.7.2 SAx Adaptive Times CH1

5.2.7.3 SAx Adaptive Times CH2

5.2.7.4 SAx Reset Adaptive Times

5.2.8 Ax Compensation

5.2.9 Ax kU1 Voltage CH1

5.2.10 A1,A3 kP1 Pressure CH1

5.2.11 Ax Temp. Comp. CH1

5.2.12 Ax Table Temp. CH1 ->

5.2.12.1 Ax Delta_t xx°C

5.2.13 Ax kU2 Voltage CH2

5.2.14 A1,A3 kP2 Pressure CH2

5.2.15 Ax Temp. Comp. CH2

5.2.16 Ax Table Temp. CH2 ->

5.2.16.1 Ax Delta_t xx°C

5.3 Analogue Data

5.3.1 Thresholds

5.3.1.1 I Current max (peak)

5.3.1.2 Ax Control Voltage max

5.3.1.3 Ax Control Voltage min

5.3.1.4 Ax Temperature max

5.3.1.5 Ax Temperature min

5.3.1.6 A1,A3 Pressure max

5.3.1.7 A1,A3 Pressure min

5.3.2 I Rated Curr. prim

5.3.3 I Rated Curr. sec



Page 15Issue 3 58.020.034 E

2004-02


Analogue Data(contin.)

5.3.4 Ax Actual Contr. Voltage

5.3.5 Ax Temperature

5.3.5.1 Ax Value at 4 mA

5.3.5.2 Ax Value at 20 mA5.3.6 A1,A3 Pressure

5.3.6.1 A1,A3 Value at 4 mA

5.3.6.2 A1,A3 Value at 20 mA

5.4 Alarms

5.4.1 Reset obligatory

5.4.2 Lock-out

5.4.3 Alarm List

5.4.3.1 Lock-out

5.4.3.2 Frequency min

5.4.3.3 Frequency max

5.4.3.4 I Current max (peak)

5.4.3.5 Ref. Voltage Failure

5.4.3.6 S RTC Impulse Failure5.4.3.7 Neutral intermediate

5.4.3.8 Neutral grounded

5.4.3.9 Neutral isolated

5.4.3.10 Selftest ERROR

5.4.3.11 Selftest CH1 ERROR

5.4.3.12 -2 Selftest CH2 ERROR

5.4.3.13 Command Time CH1 min

5.4.3.14 -2 Command Time CH2 min

5.4.3.15 S Operating Time min

5.4.3.16 S Operating Time max

5.4.3.17 S Drive Mech. Failure

5.4.3.18 Archive Full

5.4.3.19 Archive Failure5.4.3.20 Ax Control Voltage min

5.4.3.21 Ax Control Voltage max

5.4.3.22 Ax Temperature min

5.4.3.23 Ax Temperature max

5.4.3.24 Ax Temp. Transd. Fault

5.4.3.25 A1,A3 Pressure min

5.4.2.26 A1,A3 Pressure max

5.4.3.27 A1,A3 Pressure Transd. Fault

5.5 Measurement

5.5.1 I Current Graphs

5.5.2 Measured Times

5.5.2.1 Command OUT

5.5.2.2 S CB Signal received5.5.2.3 Ax Calculated Op. Time

5.5.2.4 S Measured Op. Time

5.5.3 Frequency

5.5.4 I Current (RMS)

5.5.5 Ax Control Voltage



Page 16Issue 3 58.020.034 E2004-02


Measurement (contin.)

5.5.6 Ax Temperature

5.5.7 Ax Temperature f. Comp

5.5.8 Ax Additional Op. Times

5.5.8.1 Ax Voltage CH1

5.5.8.2 Ax Voltage CH 25.5.8.3 Ax Temperature CH1

5.5.8.4 Ax Temperature CH2

5.5.8.5 A1,A3 Pressure CH1

5.5.8.6 A1,A3 Pressure CH2

5.5.9 A3 Pressure (L1/L2/L3)

5.5.10 A1 Pressure (L1)

5.6 Aux. Functions

5.6.1 S Alarm Output

5.6.2 S Alarm Input

5.6.3 Error Type

5.7 Switching Archive

3. APPLICATION NOTES

3.1. General Descript ion of the Functions

The RPH2 Point-on-Wave Controller is a three-phase control device for circuit breakerswith single pole drives. It can be used for both the energizing and de-energizing of highvoltage devices.

3.1.1. Synchronized switching

3.1.1.1. Closing

Energizing of transformers, reactors and capacitors is normally effected three-pole - forall 3 phases simultaneously. In doing this the point on wave is left up to chance. Ifclosing is carried out in this manner, high inrush currents with high DC components areunavoidable. When energizing capacitors additional high switching surges can occur.The results are unwanted operation of protection devices and repercussions onmachines and network.

The inrush currents and switching surges can be reduced to an acceptable rate byinstalling closing resistors at the circuit breaker. The costs for such closing resistors arevery high, due to the mechanical expenditure. Besides, the necessarily high energeticabsorbtivity of the resistor material sets relatively restricted limits of practicability.

By selecting a suitable switching time the physical causes of these high inrush currentscan be counteracted. This possibility is effected through synchronized switching with theRPH2. This enables the three poles of a circuit breaker to be controlled independently.



Page 17Issue 3 58.020.034 E

2004-02

3.1.1.2. Opening

The de-energizing of shunt reactors is a critical process liable to generate re-ignitionsbetween circuit breaker contacts. This means very high stress for the insulation of boththe shunt reactor and the circuit breaker.

If the contact separation takes place a sufficient amount of time before the current zerocrossing through suitable circuit breaker control, to ensure a gap capable of withstandingthe transient recovery voltage at interruption.

3.1.2. Circuit breaker

The mechanical closing time of the circuit breaker is defined as the time between theelectrical command to the operating coil and touching of the main contacts.

On the other hand, the opening time is the time between the electrical command and theseparation of the main contacts. The operating times of circuit breakers, independent ofthe breaking system and the type of operating mechanism, changes in dependence oncertain service parameters:

• With reduced control voltage at the operating coil there is less energy available to

change the electrical control commands into a mechanical action. The operatingtime extends itself. (Valid for all types of operating drives.)

• By altering the hydraulic pressure on hydraulic drives, the energy available to carryout the switching movement changes.

• The ambient temperature is the most complex parameter of influence. The electricalresistance of the operating coils, the oil viscosity and the pressure of the SF6 gasare all dependent on the temperature. Moreover, there is expansion of operatingrods and porcelains. All these parameters influence the operating time in differentways.

In the extreme, each of these 3 parameters can alter the operating time by somemilliseconds. The RPH2 is in the position to compensate these operating time variations.

3.1.3. RPH2 structure

The outstanding features of the RPH2 are:

• Microprocessor control with a switching command time resolution of 0,1 ms.

• Large graphic display to show the adjusted and measured values ( in German,English and French or user defined language)

• Easy setting via keypad or PC interface.

• Analogue module for measuring control voltage, pressure and temperature, for thecompensation of changes in operating time.



Page 18Issue 3 58.020.034 E2004-02

• Current measuring function for the graphic display of the line currents duringswitching.

• Extensive alarm functions

• Two switching functions (CLOSING and OPENING) with one device are possible.

• Switching programs with fixed switching times for the most frequent applications.

• A free program is available for special user-defined applications (e.g. switchingunloaded lines).

• Extensive archive function. The most important data for the last 1000 operations arestored in a non-volatile memory and are available for diagnostic purposes.

• Comfortable PC software for setting and read-out archive data. All data can bestored and printed out. If the user cannot find sufficiency with the three languagesmentioned previously, then the display can be translated into the user's nationallanguage using PC software.

• Compact housing for flush mounting or wall mounting.

3.1.4. Function of the RPH2

The phase-synchronous trigger-signal is taken from the network voltage (phase L1). Thetrigger-signal is based on the voltage-zeros of the reference voltage.The network voltage is also used as a reference for circuit opening. The amount ofphase shift between current and voltage is almost always +90°el. or -90°el. (A deviation

of ±1°el. creates a variation of ±0,06 ms of the switching point.)The controller's mode of operation shown below. The diagrams are only single-phasedand shown without transient effects which may possibly occur.

3.1.4.1. Energizing of an inductive load in the voltage maximum (Fig. 1) At any point on wave whatever, the control impulse is given to the RPH2 (1). The nextvoltage zero crossing is the internal synchronizing impulse (2). Depending on the givenoperating time for the respective pole, a time delay t_d is calculated so that current startsat the required time (3). Through the unavoidable pre-arcing in the circuit breaker polethe current begins before actually touching the contacts. Contact touching happens atthe pre-arcing time after the voltage maximum (optimum switching time). The requiredpre-arcing time t_arc is separately adjustable for all three phases. The two other phasesare controlled in the same (independent) manner.



Page 19Issue 3 58.020.034 E

2004-02

Figure 1

t arc

t d CB operating time

System

voltage

Current

CB-ON

command

to RPH2

Command

by RPH2

CB main

contact

1

2

3

4

timet_arc...pre-arcing time of CB

t_d... delay time of RPH2

3.1.4.2. Breaking of an inductive current

At any point on wave whatever, the control impulse is given to the RPH2 (1). The nextvoltage zero crossing is the internal synchronizing impulse (2). Depending on the givenoperating time for the respective pole, a time delay t_d is calculated so that contactseparation occurs at the required time (3). In the time between contact separation andthe following current zero crossing, the contacts have separated so far that after thecurrent breaking in the zero crossing (4),an adequate contact gap exists to withstand thetransient recovery voltage. The required arcing time t_arc is separately adjustable for allthree phases. The two other phases are controlled in the same (independent) manner.

Figure 2

t_arc

t_d CB operating time

t_arc...arcing time of CB

t_d ...delay time of RPH2

System

voltage

Current

CB-OFF

command

to RPH2

Command

by RPH2

CB main

contact

1

2

3

4

time



Page 20Issue 3 58.020.034 E2004-02

Whether the system neutral is grounded or isolated, the RPH2 registers the signalcontacts of the neutral earthingswitch and automatically selects the correct switchingtime.

3.1.4.3. Switching program

The RPH2 already has several preconfigured switching programs for various uses.The treatment of the system neutral of the network is automatically taken intoconsideration.The trigger point for the switching times is the beginning of the period that isdeterminated by the zero crossing of the voltage L1-N (reference voltage). The givendelay times in table 1 are given in milliseconds after the trigger point. They show themoment where current flow begins or ends (point (4) in figures 1 and 2). The RPH2automatically takes pre-arcing and breaking times into account.

The following programs are available:

• Transformer (transformer, transformer bank, three-core reactor)

• Reactor (reactor group)

• Capacitor bank

• Free program

The following table is based on a phase sequence of the network ofL1= reference L2= reference - 120° L3= reference - 240°

Table 1: Delay times of the various switching programs.

Switching programs Neutral Operation Delay timeL1 L2 L3

Transformer GROUNDED CLOSING 5 (4.2) 10 (8.3) 10 (8.3)

OPENING 5 (4.2) 1.7 (1.4) 8.3 (6.9)

ISOLATED CLOSING 5 (4.2) 0 0

OPENING 5 (4.2) 10 (8.3) 10 (8.3)

Reactor GROUNDED CLOSING 5 (4.2) 1.7 (1.4) 8.3 (6.9)

OPENING 5 (4.2) 1.7 (1.4) 8.3 (6.9)

ISOLATED CLOSING 5 (4.2) 0 0OPENING 5 (4.2) 10 (8.3) 10 (8.3)

Capacitor GROUNDED CLOSING 0 6.7 (5.6) 3.3 (2.8)

OPENING 5 (4.2) 1.7 (1.4) 8.3 (6.9)

ISOLATED CLOSING 10 (8.3) 5 (4.2) 5 (4.2)

OPENING 5 (4.2) 10 (8.3) 10 (8.3)

Values in () for 60 Hz.The free program enables the user to select whatever switching time for both switchingfunctions (if available) and for both types of neutral treatment.

3.2. Switching of Transformers and Reactors

For this switching task select the program "Transformer" in the menu [System Data][Switching Program]. The switching times are specified as seen in table 1.

For transformers with primary windings in delta connection the program for isolatedneutral must be used (short circuit the terminals -X6:8 with -X8:11 of the RPH2).



Page 21Issue 3 58.020.034 E

2004-02

3.2.1. Closing

3.2.1.1. Networks with grounded Neutral

Circuit breaker closing takes place in the voltage peak in order to prevent transientprocesses. With earthed-neutral networks the obvious thing to do would be to switchoffset the three phases L1, L2 and L3 in their respective voltage peak, i.e. timewise each

one about a third of the period. Due to the mutual coupling of the individual phases (viathe iron core in three-core transformers or via the low-voltage winding in transformerbanks) this switching sequence did not have the desired effect. The first phase L1 isclosed in the voltage peak (a quarter period after the voltage zero crossing of thereference voltage L1-N). Because the first phase is laid to nominal voltage, the flux in therelevant core rises also to its nominal value. This flux closes via both the remaining, non-generated cores, to each a half. If closing of the two remaining phases occurs a quarterperiod after the first, current flow can start immediately and without transient process(switching sequence L1-L2+L3).

3.2.1.2. Networks with isolated Neutral

With an isolated neutral, closing of one phase makes no sense. Two phases must beclosed first (L2 and L3) and the obvious thing to do would be to select for the switchingtime the voltage peak of the phase to phase voltage (i.e. zero crossing of the referencevoltage L1-N). Switching on the third phase occurs about a quarter period later, at thepeak of voltage L1 (switching sequence L2+L3-L1).

3.2.2. Opening

For switching off transformers and three leg reactors with the RPH2, please read point3.3.2 "Switching off Reactor Groups".

3.2.3. Data on circui t breaker required

The following data on the circuit breaker are absolutely necessary to operate the RPH2:

The mechanical closing and/or opening operating time of the three circuit breaker poles(see 3.1.2 for definition). Accuracy about ±0,1 ms.

3.2.3.1. Closing

For closing at the correct time, the pre-arcing time of the breaker at the closing voltage(see table 2) according to the phases and the treatment of the system neutral.

Table 2: Closing Voltage (Un= system voltage (rms.))

Phase Neutral Grounded Neutral Isolated

L1 √(2/3)*Un 1.5*√(2/3)*Un

L2 ½*√2*Un ½*√2*Un

L3 ½*√2*Un ½*√2*Un

If the exact value cannot be obtained from the breaker manufacturer, the optimumclosing time can be determined through switching tests with oscillographicalmeasurements of the inrush currents. For RPH2 with option I, the inrush currents aredirectly shown by the device (curve course and peak value). For the tests it is advisable



Page 22Issue 3 58.020.034 E2004-02

to begin with an assumed pre-arcing time of 3 ms at √(2/3)*Un, 2.5 ms at ½*√2*Un and

4.5 ms at 1.5*√(2/3)*Un.

3.2.3.2. Opening

Data of the optimum arcing time in order to guarantee a sure current breaking in the nextzero crossing.

See 3.3.3 for further information

3.2.4. Necessary Switching Time Accuracy

With regard to the accuracy of the switching time, closing in the voltage peak is not socritical. By closing at 1 ms before or after the peak, the voltage still amounts to 95 % ofthe peak value, at 2 ms at least 81 % (valid for 50 Hz).

Therefore an accuracy of ±2 ms at 50 Hz or 60 Hz is sufficient.

See 3.3.4 for opening values

3.3. Switching of Reactor Groups

For this switching task select the program "Reactor" in the menu [System Data][Switching Program]. The switching times are specified as seen in table 1.If the RPH2 is only to be used for opening, then this program can also be used toswitch three core reactors (switching moments are identical to the transformerprogram).

3.3.1. Closing


Closing takes place in the voltage peak in order to prevent transient processes. Withgrounded neutral networks the three phases L1, L2 and L3 are closed in their respectivevoltage peak, i.e. timewise each one offset about a third of the period, as there is no

coupling between the phases (switching sequence L2-L1-L3).


Closing runs according to the same principles as in the program for transformers (see3.2.1.2).

3.3.2. Opening

Breaking of small inductive currents, as is with reactors, can lead to high switchingsurges if current chopping or restriking in the circuit breaker occurs.Contact separation should take place a sufficient time before current zero crossing sothat after current breaking the contact gap is great enough to withstand the recoveryvoltage. The switching times given in table 1, indicate the moment of current breaking.

The necessary arcing window is taken into account by the RPH2 through the arcingtime.

3.3.3. Data on circui t breaker required

The following data on the circuit breaker are absolutely necessary to operate the RPH2:



Page 23Issue 3 58.020.034 E

2004-02

The mechanical closing and/or opening operating time of the three circuit breaker poles

(see 3.1.2 for definition). Accuracy about ±0,1 ms.

3.3.3.1. Closing

The pre-arcing times of the circuit breaker must be known.

• Pre-arcing time of the breaker in the voltage peak: equal value for all three phases

with grounded neutral or for phase L1 with isolated neutral.• Pre-arcing time with partial voltage: for phases L2 and L3 with isolated neutral (seetable 2)

3.3.3.2. Opening

The optimum arcing time input determines the arcing window for a secure currentbreaking, free from restrikes, in the next zero crossing. The value is given by the breakermanufacturer.

In order not to come into conflict with unavoidable operating time tolerances, contactseparation should begin 1,5 ms after zero crossing at the earliest, i.e. do not select anarcing time of longer than 8,5 ms (6,8 ms at 60 Hz). About a quarter period as arcingtime is regarded as standard time.

3.3.4. Necessary Switching Time Accuracy

For circuit breaker closing, point 3.2.4 applies (standard value ±2 ms).

For circuit breaker opening, the breaker should achieve an operating time accuracy

of ±1,5 ms.

3.4. Switching of unloaded Capacitors

For this switching task select the program "Capacitor" in the menu [System Data][Switching Program]. The switching times are specified as seen in table 1.

3.4.1. Closing

High inrush currents and high voltage surges can occur with the random switching ofcapacitors, especially if switching takes place in the voltage peak. The effects of parallelswitching of capacitors is particularly serious. Particularly high voltage surges can occur,due to reflections at the end of radial networks.


Closing takes place in the voltage zero crossing of the related phase-to earth voltage,i.e. all phases offset one third of the period (switching sequence L1-L3-L2).


As a unipolar switching makes no sense, two phases are simultaneously closed in thevoltage zero crossing of their phase to phase voltage. The third phase follows a quarterperiod later (switching sequence L2+L3-L1).



Page 24Issue 3 58.020.034 E2004-02

3.4.2. Opening

In general, breaking of capacitive currents represents no problem for modern circuitbreakers. If the RPH2 is used for the synchronized switching of capacitor banks, thenthe same applies as in 3.3.2, i.e. contact separation in sufficient time before voltage zerocrossing.

3.4.3. Data on circui t breaker requiredThe following data on the circuit breaker are absolutely necessary to operate the RPH2:

The mechanical closing and/or opening operating time of the three poles (see 3.1.2 for

definition). Accuracy about ±0,1 ms.

In order to achieve the necessary accuracy when closing in the voltage zero crossing,the rate of fall of the withstand voltage (dUd/dt) of the breaker should be greater than therate of change of the gap voltage at voltage zero (dU/dt). Figure 3 shows three possiblecases.

1 The rate of fall of the breakers withstand voltage (dUd/dt) is less than the rate offall of the system voltage (dU/dt). dUd/dt < dU/dt, k<1.The breaker can be used for this application if dUd/dt > 0.8*dU/dt. In this caseplease contact the manufacturer of the breaker for calculation of the pre-arcingtimes.

2 The rate of fall of the breakers withstand voltage (dUd/dt) is equal to the rate of fallof the system voltage (dU/dt). dUd/dt = dU/dt, k=1.

3 The rate of fall of the breakers withstand voltage (dUd/dt) is greater than the rateof fall of the system voltage (dU/dt). dUd/dt > dU/dt, k>1.

Figure 3

u1 2 3

1 interrupter dielectric strength lower than dU/dt of system voltage

2 interrupter dielectric strength equal dU/dt of system voltage

3 interrupter dielectric strength greater than dU/dt of system voltage

t



Page 25Issue 3 58.020.034 E

2004-02

However, some pre-arcing may be inevitable due to variations in the closing time andthe spread in dielectric withstand. To minimise energizing transients, the closing shouldaim at an instant, td, after the voltage zero (the RPH2 takes this into account through agiven arcing time). If data is not available from the breaker manufacturer, the pre-arcingtime can be approximated. Modern breakers have closing contact speeds of typical 5m/s and a dielectric strength of more than 20 kV/mm. That results in a fall rate (dUd/dt)of more than 100 kV/ms.

Figure 4 shows the voltage across the open contact gap and the withstand voltage fallwith varying closing times. The arcing time ta is calculated so that the withstandvoltage is approx. the same value as the upper and lower operating time tolerance.

Figure 4

u

T T

ta

Up

t

Ud

voltage across the open contact gap and withstand voltage

fall with varying closing time T1±ΔT

T1

The RPH2 arcing time setting can be calculated according to the following formulas.

Take note of the differing arcing times with isolated neutrals. The calculations must beverified by switching tests.



Page 26Issue 3 58.020.034 E2004-02

Note: The system voltage in the following formulas is related to one interruptingchamber of the circuit breaker, take care in case of breakers with multiple interruptingchambers!The voltage across one interrupting chamber is calculated as follows where "m" is thenumber of interrupting chambers of one pole:

Un... Voltage for one interrupting chamber

The following example demonstrates the calculation for the pre-arcing time for eachpole with various system neutral treatments.

U n = U 1.05m

system

m-1

⋅

U [kV] systemvoltage (rms) for one interrupting chamber

u'= U [kV] peak value, neutral grounded, for all poles

u'= U [kV] peak value, neutral isolated, for the two

first poles L2 and L3

u'=1.5 U [kV] peak value, neutral isolated, for the last

pole L1

u' [kV/ms] rateof fall of system voltage

dU

dt [kV/ ms] rate of fall of CB withstand voltage

dU

dt

dU

dt

=

n

n

n

n

d

d

⋅

⋅

⋅ ⋅

= ⋅ ⋅

⎛ ⎝ ⎜

⎞ ⎠⎟

⎛ ⎝ ⎜

⎞ ⎠⎟

2

3

2

2

23

1

1000

dU

dt ω

k [p.u.] see figure 3

T [ms] variation of CB closing time

t =

sin( T

1000

k [ms] prearcing time set to RPH2

U =sin( T

1000u [kV] prearcing voltage

a

p

Δ

Δ

Δ

ω

ω

ω

⋅

⋅ ⋅

⋅ ⋅

)

)

1000



Page 27Issue 3 58.020.034 E

2004-02

Example:

U 145 [kV] system voltage (rms)

u'= 118.4 [kV] peak value, neutral grounded, for all poles

u'= 102.5 [kV] peak value, neutral isolated, for the two

first poles L2 and L3

u'= 177.6 [kV] peak value, neutral isolated, for the last pole L1

[kV / ms] rateof fall of system voltage, neutral grounded

[kV / ms] rateof fall of system voltage, neutral isolated

(for the two first poles L2 and L3)

[kV / ms] rateof fall of system voltage, neutral i

n =

dU

dt

dU

dt

dU

dt

=

=

=

37 2

32 2

558

.

.

. solated

(for the last pole L1)

dU

dt= 100 [kV / ms] rate of fall of CB withstand voltage

k = 2.7 [p.u.] neutral grounded, for L1, L2, L3

k = 3.1 [p.u.] neutral isolated, for L2, L3

k = 1.8 [p.u.] neutral isolated, for L1

T = 1 [ms] variation of CB closing time

ta = 0.4 [ms] neutral grounded, prearcing time set to RPH2

for all poles

ta = 0.3 [ms] neutral isolated, prearcing time set to RPH2

for poles L2 and L3

ta = 0.5 [ms]

d

Δ ±

neutral isolated, prearcing time set to RPH2

for pole L1

3.4.4 Necessary Switching Time Accuracy

Capacitor energizing places the greatest demands on the breaker in reference tooperating time constancy. Every variation from the required switching time leads to a

higher withstand voltage value which causes greater surges and inrush currents.Closing time variation should amount to ± 1 ms at the most. When this accuracy cannotbe maintained under all conditions, we recommend the use of the analogue moduleoption A to correct the operating time influences.

For closing, the switch should reach a operating time accuracy of ± 1,5 ms.



Page 28Issue 3 58.020.034 E2004-02

3.5 Switching (closing) of uncharged Lines

Uncharged high voltage lines are to be fundamentally treated like capacitors. Due tothe inter-phase coupling the switching moments are not the same as for capacitorbanks. The RPH2 can also be used for auto-reclosing of uncompensated linesequipped with inductive potential transformers. During the auto-reclose dead-time thetrapped charges on the line must be fully discharged by the inductive potentialtransformers!

Whether the system neutral is earthed or isolated does not effect the switchingmoments.

The RPH2 must be set to the [User Program] with the following settings (see also5.1.5.1).

For [T_C1 Neutral isolated] and for [T_C1 Neutral grounded] the same values must beset:

50 Hz:

L1 = 0 msL2 = 7.3 msL3 = 13.3 ms

60 Hz:L1 = 0 msL2 = 6.1 msL3 = 11.1 ms



Page 29Issue 3 58.020.034 E

2004-02

4 FUNCTIONS OF THE ADDITIONAL MODULES

4.1 Signal Module: Option S

4.1.1 Alarm outputsThe module offers additional outlets (alarm 2 to 7). Each alarm contact correspondswith the associated indicator-LED (LED 2 to 7) at the front. The allocation of the alarmfunctions to the output contacts is user-defined. Many alarm functions can be laid toone output. The procedure is described in chapter 5.

4.1.2 Opto coupler inputs

Opto coupler inputs with pre-defined functions are available.

4.1.2.1 Measuring the operating time

Three inputs serve to measure the operating time of the three poles via their auxiliarycontacts. (Resolution 0,5 ms). The circuit breaker auxiliary contacts signalling (contact

52a) works with an internal RPH2 voltage (48 VDC), i.e. potential-free contacts arenecessary. The necessary wiring is to be carried out according to the accompanyingwiring diagram.

Figure 5

CB main

contact

CB aux.

contact

CB maincontact

CB aux.

contact

closing

opening

-Δt

Δt

time

To compensate the time shift between the main contacts and the auxiliary contacts ofthe breaker poles, the possibility exists to feed in a compensation time in order tomaintain the operating time as real value on the display and in the archives. Figure 5shows the correlation as an example. If the auxiliary contact closes after the main

contact then the compensation time value. Δt is negative, if the auxiliary contact opensbefore the main contact then a positive value results. If no possibility exists to measure

the time shift of the auxiliary contacts, this value can also be determined via the RPH2within the time release limits.Conditions:

• The pole operating times given by the manufacturer are correctly fed in (see 5.1 and5.2)



Page 30Issue 3 58.020.034 E2004-02

• The environmental conditions correspond approx. to the conditions when measuringthe pole operating times in the factory. With strong deviations in the environmentalconditions, the pole operating times must be measured again on site.

• The RPH2 compensating function is deactivated (see 5.6).

• The circuit breaker can be operated repeatedly without load (with opened busbardisconnector.

Operate the circuit breaker via the RPH2 with channel 1.

Change to the menu [Measurement] / [Measured Times].In the menu [Measured Op. Times] (Figure 6) the measured pole operating timesappear in the status line, including the main contact/auxiliary contact time shift.

Figure 6

M e a s u r d T i m e s

C o m m a n d O U TC B S i g n a l R e c e i v e d

C a l c u l a t e d O p . T i m e s> M e a s u r e d O p . T i m e

1 4 6 . 5 1 4 5 . 6 1 4 6 . 1 m s

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3

The value for "H-contact SK1 Diff" for every pole is calculated with:

[Aux. Timeshift CH1] = [Pole operating time] - [Measured Op. Time]

The input values in figure 7 are calculated with the values form figure 6 and .the valuesof the pole operating times.

Figure 7

C B D a t a - >

A r c i n g T i m e C H 1 A r c i n g T i m e C H 2

> A u x . T i m e s h i f t C H 1 A u x . T i m e s h i f t C H 2

- 7 . 2 - 6 . 9 - 6 . 5 m s

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3

Because the operating times are measured with a resolution of 0,5 ms, it is possiblynecessary to constitute the average value from several switching operations. Feed inthe determined values under [CB Data] / [Aux. Timeshift CH1] (figure 7) and check the

measured operating times as described above. A further compensation is possiblynecessary.

Pole operating times:

L1 = 139.3 msL2 = 138.7 ms

L3 = 139.6 ms



Page 31Issue 3 58.020.034 E

2004-02

Check in all cases that the measured operating time corresponds with actual operatingtimes of the circuit breaker. This is essential for using the function of the adaptivecontrol !

For devices with two switching functions (RPH2-2), repeat the procedure for thesecond switching channel too.

4.1.2.2 Remote reset

An input for remote reset is available. A potential-free contact (closer) is necessary ascontrol device. Drive takes place with the RPH2 intern 48 VDC voltage.

4.1.2.3 Real time clock synchronization

A further input is for synchronizing with a radio clock. It can be parallel switched withother synchronized control devices. A potential-free contact is necessary.

4.2 Analogue Module: Option A

With this module the influence of environmental parameters on the pole operating timecan be compensated. External sensors are necessary for pressure and temperaturemeasurement. Control voltage, pressure and temperature are continually measured.

The voltage and pressure values are immediately available for the calculation ofcompensation times. The shown vales in the menus [Measured value/Control voltage]and [Measured value/Pressure] are the basic calculating factors. An average value formation is carried out for temperature compensation.Update takes place every two hours. The stored temperature value is compared withthe measured value and the stored temperature is compensated by half the difference(figure 8). In the menu [Measured value/Temperature] the actual measuredtemperature is shown, in the menu [Measured value/Temperature f. Comp.] theaverage is shown which is effective for compensation.

Figure 8

ambient temperature

temperature for compensation



Page 32Issue 3 58.020.034 E2004-02

In the menu [Measured value/Compensation] each of the actual additional times areshown. After the key-operated switch is turned form "OFF" to "OPERATION", the RPH2carries out an automatic check and all analogue measured values for compensationare set at the actual measured value.

4.2.1 Control Voltage Compensation

Measuring the control voltage is done internally in the RPH2 and no additionalequipment is necessary. The RPH2 calculates the additional times for operating timecompensation according to a function with an open parameter. By fixing theseparameters the compensation function can be suited to the character of the powerswitch. Calculation for opening and closing takes place separately. The parameter kU1works for switching channel 1, kU2 for switching channel 2 (only for devices with 2switching functions). If a zero value is fed in for a parameter, then no additional timesare calculated and the compensation function concerned is blocked. Fixing thecompensation parameters takes place through calculation or with the assistance of theaccompanying PC Software.

Two breaker characteristic measured points are required to calculate the compensationfunction:

• One point with nominal conditions (value 1): measured pole operating time (of onepole) with rated voltage, rated pressure and rated temperature. In general that is themanufacturer value for pole operating time.

• A second point with deviation conditions (value 2): measured pole operating time ofthe same pole with rated pressure, rated temperature and reduced control voltage.

Figure 9 shows an example of a circuit breaker opening:

Value 1 (with nominal conditions):U1 = 220 VDC Rated control voltaget1 = 27.0 ms Pole operating time with nominal conditionsValue 2:U2 = 180 VDC Reduced control voltaget2 = 29.2 ms Pole operating time with control voltage U2

Figure 9

140 160 180 200 220 240

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

O p e r a t i n g T i m e [ m s ]

Operating Voltage [V]

Value 1

(U1/t1)

Value 2

(U2/t2)

Function calculated by RPH2



Page 33Issue 3 58.020.034 E

2004-02

The compensation parameter kU can be calculated using the following formula:

Value 1:

U [V] rated control voltage

t [ms] CB operating time at nominal conditions

Value 2:U [V] reduced control voltage

t [ms] CB operating time with U

kU =(t - t ) 100

U

Ut

drive mechanism parameter

1

1

2

2 2

2 1

1

2

1

⋅

− ⋅( )1

The input from above results in a compensation parameter kU = 36.6

With RPH2's with two switching functions, the calculation for kU1 and kU2 is to be

carried out separately for both switching channels and the values stored in the RPH2.

4.2.2 Temperature Compensation

An external sensor with integrated transducer (2 conductors, auxiliary voltage 24 VDC)and standard output signal (4 ... 20 mA) is necessary for measuring the temperature.The transducer supply is effected through the RPH2. Up to eight RPH2's can beparallel switched to one temperature transducer. See the connection plan 58.010.111-xx also.

The RPH2 calculates the additional times for operating time compensation according toa piecewise linear function with one control point every 10 °C in the range of -50 °Cand +50 °C. So all kinds of temperature functions of the circuit breaker (from linear to

exponential) can be set to the RPH2. The measured values can be entered in the tablein figure 10. The line Delta_t = 0 ms defines the nominal operating time of the circuitbreaker under normal conditions. The values of Delta_t at different ambienttemperatures are the differences of the measured operating times to the nominaloperating time. The 11 values of Delta_t(T) (T = -50 °C to +50 °C) must be set to theRPH2.

In the example in figure 11 the procedure is shown. The measured values are markedby squares. Connect the points by lines end eventually extend the lines to the extremes(dotted line in the example). Evaluate the values of Delta_t(T) at the control points (-50 °C to +50 °C) so to get the 11 values for Delta_t(T) shown in the table in figure 11.

By using the PC software "RPH2- Tool" also an exponential function with one open

parameter can be calculated. Especially for circuit breakers with spring drivemechanism this option will be useful.



Page 34Issue 3 58.020.034 E2004-02

Figure 10

Delta_t [ms]

Ambint Temperature [°C]



Page 35Issue 3 58.020.034 E

2004-02

Figure 11

Delta_t [ms]

measured values

Amb ien t Temperatu re [°C]

With RPH2's with two switching functions, the evaluation of Delta_t(T) has to be carriedout separately for both switching channels and the values stored in the RPH2.

4.2.3 Hydraulic Pressure Compensation

There are two module models available for measuring pressure:

• Option A1: for breakers with a mutual hydraulic system for all three poles

• Option A3: for breakers with separate hydraulic systems for each pole

One (Option A1) or three (Option A3) external sensors with integrated transducer (2conductors, auxiliary voltage 24 VDC) and standard output signal (4 ... 20 mA) arenecessary for measuring hydraulic pressure. The transducer supply is effected throughthe RPH2.

Temperature Delta_t

-50 °C 13.0 ms

-40 °C 9.0 ms

-30 °C 5.0 ms-20 °C 2.5 ms

-10 °C 1.6 ms

0 °C 0.8 ms

+10 °C 0.4 ms

+20 °C 0.0 ms

+30 °C -0.2 ms

+40 °C -0.4 ms

+50 °C -1.0 ms



Page 36Issue 3 58.020.034 E2004-02

The RPH2 calculates the additional times for operating time compensation according toa function with one open parameter. By fixing this parameter, the compensationfunction can be suited to the character of the circuit breaker. Calculation for openingand closing takes place separately. The parameter kP1 works for switching channel 1,kP2 for switching channel 2 (only for devices with 2 switching functions). For the modelwith option A3 with pressure measuring per pole only a compensation parameter foreach of the three poles is fed in. If a zero value is fed in for a parameter, then no

additional times are calculated and the compensation function concerned is blocked.Fixing the compensation parameters takes place through calculation or with theassistance of the accompanying PC Software.

Two measuring points of the switching characteristic analogue for 4.2.1 are required tocalculate the equalising curve:

• One point with rated conditions (value 1): measured pole operating time (of onepole) with rated voltage, rated pressure and rated temperature. In general that is themanufacturer value for pole operating time.

• A second point with deviation conditions (value 2): measured pole operating time ofthe same pole with rated control voltage, rated temperature and reduced hydraulicpressure.

Example:Value 1 (with nominal conditions):P1 = 265 bar Rated pressuret1 = 110.5 ms Pole operating time with nominal conditionsValue 2:P2 = 200 bar Reduced pressuret2 = 127.7 ms Pole operating time with pressure P2

The compensation parameters kP can be calculated using the following formula.

Value 1:

P [V] rated hydraulic pressure

t [ms] CB operating time at nominal conditions

Value 2:

P [V] reduced hydraulic pressure

t [ms] CB operating time with P

kP =(t - t ) 100

P

Pt

drive mechanism parameter

1

1

2

2 2

2 1

1

2

1

⋅

− ⋅( )1

The input from above results in a compensation parameter kP = 47.9.

With RPH2's with two switching functions, the calculation for kP1 and kP2 is to becarried out separately for both switching channels and the values stored in the RPH2.



Page 37Issue 3 58.020.034 E

2004-02

4.2.4 Specifications for the external sensors

For measuring pressure and temperature, external sensors with integrated transducerare necessary which are not part of the delivery.

The integrated transducers must meet the following requirements:

Auxiliary voltage 24 VDC (supplied by the RPH2)2 conductor systemOutput signal 4 mA to 20 mA

Such transducers can be obtained from many manufacturers. The measuring range ofthe sensors adjust itself to the respective requirements.However, unnecessarily large measuring ranges reduce the measuring accuracy of theRPH2. The RPH2 measuring input is adapted to the measuring range of the sensorthrough parameterisation.

Transducer installation is carried out according to the manufacturer's guidelines.Likewise, the connection cables to the RPH2 must be selected according to themanufacturer's information. If no information is available, we recommend a shielded

two-wire cable per transducer, or at least a twisted pair of wires.

4.2.5 Adapti ve Control

RPH2 with analogue module A and signal module S provide the additional feature of anadaptive control to compensate the long time drift in operating time of the CB drive. Theactual operating times of the poles are measured by the signal module. A weightingfactor in the range of 0 to 0.5, step 0.05 (0 = function is disabled) is used for controllingthis function. A fraction (depending on the weighting factor) of the time differencebetween the operating time of the last operation and the operation before is added to theactual operating time. Additional operating times due to compensation functions are nottaken into consideration, so the pure long time drift of the drive mechanism iscompensated. The additional adaptive times are displayed and a function is available to

reset these times.

The compensation of the time shift between the main contacts and the auxiliary contactsof the breaker poles must be done very exactly to avoid errors in measuring of the actualoperating times.

• Time deviations of the measured values greater than 10 ms are not considered. (nooperation of the CB or incorrect measurement of operating times).

• Additional adaptive time is limited to 1 ms from one operation to the next.

• If the operating time corrected by adaptive control has drifted away from the pre-setoperating times for more than

±5 ms for opening

±10 ms for closing

the alarm "Drive mech. Failure" is generated.

The value of the weighting factor depends on the type of drive mechanism. We proposea value of 0.25 to 0.30 for all types of mechanism.



Page 38Issue 3 58.020.034 E2004-02

4.3 Current Module Option I

A current measuring module is available to make the switching of large transformersand reactors easy when putting the RPH2 Point-on-Wave Controller into operation.With this the inrush current can be recorded and graphically displayed during theswitching process. Data for the last 4 switching operations are stored in a non-volatilememory and can be analysed on the display. Primary values are shown after feeding inthe current transformer current ratio.

For every phase there is an input for each 1 A and 5 A available. Because the currentinputs have a short time withstand of 100 xln, current measurement can be carried outover a measuring core as well as a protection core of the current transformer.



Page 39Issue 3 58.020.034 E

2004-02

5 RPH2 MENUE SYSTEM

5.1 System data

- - R P H 2 - 2 S I A 3 - -

> S y s t e m D a t aC B D a t a A n a l o g D a t a A l a r m s

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3

Enter + - Esc

5.1.1 Password

The factory-setting of the-password is "0000". To activate the password you mustchange to the submenu [System Data/Password]. The actual status (‘active’ or ‘off’) isshown in the bottom-left corner of the display. Type in the correct password and confirmthe assumption by pressing the ‘Enter’-button (see chapter 2.5). The display shows‘active’ and the green LED ‘ready’ starts blinking if the password is correct (see chapter2.4.3.1).The password will be deactivated automatically if no button is pressed for more than 90seconds.

S y s t e m D a t a

> P a s s w o r dS y s t e m F r e q u e n c y


0 0 0 0

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3

5.1.2 System Frequency

After activating this function by pressing the ‘Enter’-button you can choose any item ofthe list by pressing the ‘+’- or the ‘-’-button (see chapter 2.5).

Available items: 50 Hz, 60 Hz, 16 2/3 Hz



Page 40Issue 3 58.020.034 E2004-02

S y s t e m D a t a

P a s s w o r d> S y s t e m F r e q u e n c y C o n t r o l V o l t a g e R a t e d P r e s s u r e

5 0 H z

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 L 1 L 2 L 3

5.1.3 Control Voltage

Type in the rated voltage of your CB-coil (available only for modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1, RPH2-xxA3).This value acts as base for the calculation of the additional compensation value of themechanical operating time of the CB.

S y s t e m D a t a

P a s s w o r dS y s t e m F r e q u e n c y

> C o n t r o l V o l t a g e R a t e d P r e s s u r e

2 3 0 , 0 V

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3

5.1.4 Rated Pressure

Type in the value of the rated pressure of the hydraulic system of your CB-drive(available only for module RPH2-xxA1, RPH2-xxA3). This value acts as base for thecalculation of the compensation value of the operating time of the CB.

S y s t e m D a t a

S y s t e m F r e q u e n c y C o n t r o l V o l t a g e

> R a t e d P r e s s u r eS w i t c h i n g P r o g r a m

1 0 b a r

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3

5.1.5 Switching Program

Select the suitable switching program by pressing the ‘+’- or ‘-’-button:

• transformer

• shunt reactor• capacitor bank

• user program



Page 41Issue 3 58.020.034 E

2004-02

S y s t e m D a t a


> S w i t c h i n g P r o g r a m L a n g u a g e

T r a n s f o r m e r

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 L 1 L 2 L 3

5.1.5.1 User Program

You can define your own switching moments for each phase by selecting the ‘UserProgram’.

Note: If you select ‘user program’ you have to select the rated frequency first (seechapter 5.2).

Adjustable switching moments:

T_C1 Neutral isolated:Type in the switching moments of the three phases L1/L2/L3 for channel 1 with isolatedneutral.

U s e r P r o g r a m

> T _ C 1 N e u t r . i s o l a t e d T _ C 1 N e u t r . g r o u n d e d T _ C 2 N e u t r . i s o l a t e d T _ C 2 N e u t r . g r o u n d e d

0 , 0 0 , 0 0 , 0 m s

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3

T_C1 Neutral grounded:Type in the switching moments of the three phases L1/L2/L3 for channel 1 withgrounded neutral.

The following two submenus are available only for module RPH2-2xx (module with twoswitching channels):

T_C2 Neutral isolated:Type in the switching moments of the three phases L1/L2/L3 for channel 2 with isolatedneutral.

T_C2 Neutral grounded:Type in the switching moments of the three phases L1/L2/L3 for channel 2 withgrounded neutral.



Page 42Issue 3 58.020.034 E2004-02

5.1.6 Funct ion Channel 1

For the module RPH2-1xxx you have to select whether if you use the RPH2 for closingor opening of the CB.

5.1.7 Language

Select your preferred language. Available languages:

• German

• English

• French

• User language

S y s t e m D a t a

R a t e d P r e s s u r eS w i t c h i n g P r o g r a m

> L a n g u a g eT i m e / D a t e

E n g l i s h

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 L 1 L 2 L 3

Note: You can load the menutext in any language with the RPH-Tool (PC-basedsoftware). If there any problems with the loaded language file you can return to theEnglish menus: Turn the key-operated switch to "OFF", press the "Quitt" button andmeanwhile return the key-operated switch back to "OPERATION".

5.1.8 Time / Date

Type in the actual date and time. The format for date and time is:”YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM”.

S y s t e m D a t a

S w i t c h i n g P r o g r a m L a n g u a g e

> T i m e / D a t eN e w P a s s w o r d

1 9 9 6 - 1 2 - 0 6 1 7 : 5 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3

Note: Type in only correct values for date and time.

Note: There are no problems with a date after 2000-01-01.

5.1.9 New PasswordIf you want to change the actual password simply type in the new password.Possible values are all numbers between ‘0000’ and ‘9999’.



Page 43Issue 3 58.020.034 E

2004-02

S y s t e m D a t a

L a n g u a g eT i m e / D a t e

> N e w P a s s w o r d S e l f t e s t S t a r t

0 0 0 0

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 L 1 L 2 L 3

Note: If you have forgotten the selected password, you can ask for a temporarypassword (call your local ALSTOM Grid representative)

5.1.10 Selftest Start

You can activate the selftest-facility by pressing the ‘Enter’-button.

The selftest-facility checks the internal function of the module and the switching outputs.

S y s t e m D a t a

T i m e / D a t eN e w P a s s w o r d

> S e l f t e s t S t a r t S e l f t e s t I n t e r v a l

Y E S

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3

Note: You can activate the selftest with the key-operated-switch too (see chapter 2.4.2).

5.1.11 Selftest Interval

Type in the desired interval between the automatic selftests.

The possible range is from 0,0 hours (shortest interval is 0,1 hour = 6 minutes) to 500hours. Choosing a value of 0,0 hours deactivates the automatic selftest-facility.

S y s t e m D a t a

T i m e / D a t eN e w P a s s w o r d

S e l f t e s t S t a r t> S e l f t e s t I n t e r v a l

2 4 , 0 H r

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3

In the menu [Aux. Functions][Error Type] the type errors are displayed (see 5.6.3).



Page 44Issue 3 58.020.034 E2004-02

5.2 CB Data


Type in the operating time for each phase at the rated voltage, rated pressure and atemperature of 20 °C for switching channel 1.

The permissible range is from 0,0 ms (minimum value is 0,1 ms) to 200 ms.

The switching function (closing or opening) for module RPH2-1xx depends on theselection made in the submenu ‘Function Channel 1’. (see chapter 5.1.6).

Module RPH2-2xx uses channel 1 for closing of the CB.

C B D a t a

> O p e r a t i n g T i m e CH 1 O p e r a t i n g T i m e C H 2 A r c i n g T i m e C H 1

A r c i n g T i m e C H 2

0 , 0 0 , 0 0 , 0 m s1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3

Note 1: The value of the operating time for each phase of the CB depends on the typeand manufacturer of the CB. This value is part of the CB-documentation delivered withyour CB.

Note 2: The difference between 2 phases should be less than one period (20 ms for50 Hz).

Note 3: For single-phase-CBs the values for all three phases must be the same.


Type in the operating time for each phase at the rated voltage, rated pressure and atemperature of 20 °C for switching channel 2. Channel 2 always is used for opening.


This submenu is available only for module RPH2-2xxx.


Type in the arcing time for each phase of the CB (see chapter 3.2 to 3.4).


Closing: Pre-arcing time of the CB. The closing of the main-contact happens after thechosen switching moment.



Page 45Issue 3 58.020.034 E

2004-02

Opening: Arcing time of the CB. The opening of the main-contact happens before thezero-crossing of the current.

C B D a t a

O p e r a t i n g T i m e C H 1 O p e r a t i n g T i m e C H 2

> A r c i n g T i m e C H 1

A r c i n g T i m e C H 20 , 0 0 , 0 0 , 0 m s

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3


This submenu is available only for module RPH2-2xxx. It works as for channel 1 exceptthat channel 2 always is used for opening.

5.2.5 Auxiliary Timeshif t CH1

This value is used for compensating the time lag between the main-contact and theauxiliary-contact of the CB (see chapter 4.1.2.1).

The permissible range is from -25,5 ms to +25,5 ms.

C B D a t a

A r c i n g T i m e C H 1 A r c i n g T i m e C H 2

> A u x . T i m e s h i f t C H 1 A u x . T i m e s h i f t C H 2

+ 0 , 0 + 0 , 0 + 0 , 0 m s

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3

This submenu is available only with module RPH2-xxS.

5.2.6 Auxiliary Timeshif t CH2

This submenu is available only for module RPH2-2xxx. It works as for channel 1 exceptthat channel 2 always is used for opening.

5.2.7 Adapti ve Control

This menu opens a submenu for controlling the this function (see also 4.2.5)

C B D a t a

A u x . T i m e s h i f t C H 2> A d a p t i v C o n t r o l - > C o m p e n s a t i o n k U 1 V o l t a g e CH 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3



Page 46Issue 3 58.020.034 E2004-02

This submenu and the following menus are available only with module RPH2-xSAx.

5.2.7.1 Weighting Factor

This factor defines the friction of time difference added to the operating time.

A d a p t i v C o n t r o l

> W e i g h t i n g F a c t o r A d a p t i v e T i m e s C H 1 A d a p t i v e T i m e s C H 2 R e s e t A d a p t i v e T i m e

0 . 2 5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3

The permissible range is from 0.00 to 0.50 (step 0.05). A value of 0.00 disables this function.

5.2.7.2 Adaptive Times CH1

Here the adaptive times for each pole related to switching channel 1 are displayed.

5.2.7.3 Adaptive Times CH2

Here the adaptive times for each pole related to switching channel 2 are displayed.

5.2.7.4 Reset Adaptive Times

This function allows to reset the additional times due to adaptive control to zero. Afterthis, the RPH2 operates with the pre-set pole operating times.

5.2.8 Compensation

If you select ‘NO’ all compensation functions are blocked.If you select ‘YES’ compensation is active (for description see chapter 4.2)

C B D a t a A u x . T i m e s h i f t C H 1

A u x . T i m e s h i f t C H 2> C o m p e n s a t i o n k U 1 V o l t a g e CH 1

Y E S

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3

5.2.9 kU1 Voltage CH1

Type in the calculated value for compensation of changes of the control voltage (seechapter 4.2.1).

The permissible range is from 0,0 to 150,0.



Page 47Issue 3 58.020.034 E

2004-02

C B D a t a

A u x . T i m e s h i f t C H 2 C o m p e n s a t i o n

> k U 1 V o l t a g e C H 1 k P 1 P r e s s u r e C H 1

3 0 , 3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 L 1 L 2 L 3

This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxxA1, RPH2-xxxA3.

5.2.10 kP1 Pressure CH1

same as 5.2.9, but for pressure compensation for channel 1.

This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxxA1, RPH2-xxxA3.

5.2.11 Temperature Compensation CH1

This submenu enables or disables the temperature compensation.

C B D a t a

k U 1 V o l t a g e CH 1 k P 1 P r e s u r e C H 1

> T e m p . C o m p . C H 1 T a b l e T e m p . C H 1 - >

O N

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3


5.2.12 Table Temp. CH1

This menu opens a submenu for setting the values for temperature compensation.

5.2.12.1 Delta_t xx°C

Here the 11 values of Delta_t(T) for defining the temperature compensation function canbe entered to the RPH2 (see also 4.2.2).

T a b l e T e m p . C H 1 - >

D e l t a _ t - 5 0 ° C> D e l t a _ t - 4 0 ° C D e l t a _ t - 3 0 ° C D e l t a _ t - 2 0 ° C

+ 5 . 3 m s

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 L 1 L 2 L 3

The permissible range for Delta_t is from -10.0 ms to +25.0 ms.



Page 48Issue 3 58.020.034 E2004-02

5.2.13 kU2 Voltage CH2

same as 5.2.9, but for control voltage compensation for channel 2.


5.2.14 kP2 Pressure CH2

same as 5.2.10, but for temperature compensation for channel 2.


5.2.15 Temperature Compensation CH2



5.2.16 Table Temp. CH1


5.2.16.1 Delta_t xx°C

same as 5.2.12.1, but for temperature compensation for channel 2.

5.3 Analogue Data

5.3.1 Thresholds

The following submenus are depending on the configuration of the RPH 2 obtained.Exceeding of limit-settings cause an alarm, if set (see chapter 5.4).

A n a l o g D a t a> T r e s h o l d s - > C T R a t e d C u r r . p r i m C T R a t e d C u r r . s e c

A c t u a l C o n t r . V o l t a g e

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3

5.3.1.1 Current max.

Type in the allowed maximum value (peak-value) of the current during the switchingoperation. If the current during a switching operation exceeds this limit an alarm is

generated.

The permissible range is from 0 A to 9999 A.



Page 49Issue 3 58.020.034 E

2004-02

T r e s h o l d s - >

> C u r r e n t m a x ( p e a k )O p . V o l t a g e m a xO p . V o l t a g e m i nT e m p e r a t u r e m a x

5 0 0 A

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 L 1 L 2 L 3

This submenu is only available for module RPH2-xxI.

5.3.1.2 Control Voltage max.

Type in the upper limit for the control voltage. If the measured value of the controlvoltage becomes higher than the limit an alarm is generated.

The permissible range is from 35 V to 300 V.


C u r r e n t m a x ( p e a k )> C o n t r o l V o l t a g e m a x C o n t r o l V o l t a g e m i n T e m p e r a t u r e m a x

2 4 2 , 0 V

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3

This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1, RPH2-xxA3.

5.3.1.3 Control Voltage min.

Type in the lower limit for the control voltage. If the measured value of the controlvoltage becomes lower than the limit an alarm is generated.



C u r r e n t m a x ( p e a k )O p . V o l t a g e m a x

> O p . V o l t a g e m i nT e m p e r a t u r e m a x

2 0 0 , 0 V

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3


5.3.1.4 Temperature max.Type in the upper limit for the ambient temperature of the CB. If the measured value ofthe temperature becomes higher than the limit an alarm is generated.

The permissible range is from -100° C to +100° C.



Page 50Issue 3 58.020.034 E2004-02


O p . V o l t a g e m a xO p . V o l t a g e m i n

> T e m p e r a t u r e m a xT e m p e r a t u r e m i n

+ 5 0 , 0 C

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 L 1 L 2 L 3


5.3.1.5 Temperature min.

Type in the lower limit of the ambient temperature of the CB. If the measured value ofthe temperature becomes lower than the limit an alarm is generated.

The permissible range is from -100° C to +100° C.


O p . V o l t a g e m i nT e m p e r a t u r e m a x

> T e m p e r a t u r e m i nP r e s s u r e m a x

- 5 0 . 0 C

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3

This submenu is available only for module RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1, RPH2-xxA3.

5.3.1.6 Pressure max.

Type in the upper limit of the hydraulic pressure of the CB. If the measured value of thetemperature becomes higher than the limit an alarm is generated.

The permissible range is from 0 bar to 1000 bar.


T e m p e r a t u r e m a xT e m p e r a t u r e m i n

> P r e s s u r e m a xP r e s s u r e m i n

3 5 0 b a r

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3

This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxA1, RPH2-xxA3.

5.3.1.7 Pressure min.Type in the lower limit of the hydraulic pressure of the CB. If the measured value of thetemperature becomes lower than the limit an alarm is generated.

The permissible range is from 0 bar to 1000 bar.



Page 51Issue 3 58.020.034 E

2004-02


T e m p e r a t u r e m a xT e m p e r a t u r e m i nP r e s s u r e m a x

> P r e s s u r e m i n

1 8 0 b a r

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 L 1 L 2 L 3

This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxA1, RPH2-xxA3.

5.3.2 CT Rated Current prim

Type in the rated primary current of your current transducer.

The permissible range is from 0 A to 5000 A.

A n a l o g D a t a


> C T R a t e d C u r r . p r i m C T R a t e d C u r r . s e c

A c t u a l C o n t r . V o l t a g e

5 0 0 A

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3

This submenu is available only with module RPH2-xxI.

5.3.3 CT Rated Current sec

Type in the rated secondary current of your current transducer.

Permissible values are 1 A and 5 A.

A n a l o g D a t a

T r e s h o l d s - > C T R a t e d C u r r . p r i m

> C T R a t e d C u r r . s e c A c t u a l C o n t r . V o l t a g e

5 A

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3

This submenu is available only for module RPH2-xxI.

Note: The current transformer has to be connected to the correct terminal of the RPH2(1 A or 5 A, see wiring diagram).



Page 52Issue 3 58.020.034 E2004-02

5.3.4 Actual Contro l Voltage

Type in the measured value of the actual control voltage. This input calibrates theinternal voltage measurement. This value acts as base for the calculation ofcompensation of the switching moment.


A n a l o g D a t a

C T R a t e d C u r r . p r i m C T R a t e d C u r r . s e c

> A c t u a l C o n t r . V o l t a g e T e m p e r a t u r e - >

1 1 2 , 2 V

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3


Determine the correct value:

Measure the actual value of the control voltage on terminal -X6:10 and -X6:11 with ancalibrated voltmeter and type in this value.Type in the determined value.

Note:This input calibrates the voltage measurement function. The correct input of this

value is absolutely necessary. You cannot calibrate the RPH2 with the PC-software‘RPH-Tool’.In the Normal-Mode (Ready-LED is steady-light) the measured voltage is displayed. After calibrating the voltage measurement check the correct function by monitoring thedisplay.

5.3.5 Temperature

The following submenus are available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1,RPH2-xxA3.In this submenu the temperature transducer is calibrated.

A n a l o g D a t a

C T R a t e d C u r r . s e c A c t u a l C o n t r . V o l t a g e

> T e m p e r a t u r e - > P r e s s u r e - >

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3

5.3.5.1 Value at 4 mA

Type in the rated value of the temperature transducer at an output current of 4 mA. Thisinformation is part of the documentation of the temperature transducer.



Page 53Issue 3 58.020.034 E

2004-02

T e m p e r a t u r e - >

> V a l u e a t 4 m AV a l u e a t 2 0 m A

- 4 0 , 0 C

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 L 1 L 2 L 3


Type in the rated value of the temperature transducer at an output current of 20 mA.This information is part of the documentation of the temperature transducer.

T e m p e r a t u r e - >

V a l u e a t 4 m A> V a l u e a t 2 0 m A

+ 1 0 0 , 0 C

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3

5.3.6 Pressure

These submenus are available only with modules RPH2-xxA1, RPH2-xxA3.In the following submenus the pressure transducer can be calibrated.

A n a l o g D a t a

C T R a t e d C u r r . s e c A c t u a l C o n t r . V o l t a g e

T e m p e r a t u r e - >> P r e s s u r e - >

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3


Type in the rated value of the pressure transducer at an output current of 4 mA. Thisinformation is part of the documentation of the pressure transducer.

P r e s s u r e - >

> V a l u e a t 4 m AV a l u e a t 2 0 m A

0 b a r

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3



Page 54Issue 3 58.020.034 E2004-02


Type in the rated value of the pressure transducer at an output current of 20 mA. Thisinformation is part of the documentation of the pressure transducer.

P r e s s u r e - >

V a l u e a t 4 m A> V a l u e a t 2 0 m A

5 0 0 b a r

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3

5.4 Alarms

5.4.1 Reset Obligatory

In this submenu you can select which alarm outputs (and the according LED on the front

panel of the RPH2) are to be acknowledged. Alarm-outputs which are marked as resetobligatory are displayed on the front panel and activated (closed) until you press the‘Quitt’-button, regardless whether the alarm is still active or already gone.Example:

A l a r m s

> R e s e t o b l i g a t o r y L o c k - o u t

A l a r m L i s t - >

1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3

In the example mentioned above the alarms 1 and 3 are marked with the function "Resetobligatory" (must be acknowledged).

Reset Obligatory (Setting ”1”): Alarm is active -> LED is blinking, alarm-output active Alarm is acknowledged -> LED has steady-light, alarm-output active Alarm off -> LED off, alarm-output not activerespectively: Alarm is active -> LED is blinking, alarm-output active Alarm off -> LED is blinking, alarm-output active Alarm is acknowledged -> LED off, alarm-output not active

Alarm is not reset obligatory (Setting ”0”): Alarm is active -> LED has steady-light, alarm-output active Alarm off -> LED off, alarm-output not active



Page 55Issue 3 58.020.034 E

2004-02

Note: With the function "reset obligatory" you can change an alarm-message from thetype pulse type to a steady alarm type (see 5.4.3).

5.4.2 Lock-Out

Here you can mark each of the 7 alarm outputs to produce a blocking of the device in case ofthe corresponding alarm occurs.

That means:No switching operation is possible, the green LED is dark and the contact "Device not ready"(-X6:12/13) is closed.

Some actions or alarms cause a lock out in any case ,also without activating the respondingalarm (LED dark, contact -X6:12-13 is closed):

• Keyswitch is "OFF"

• Relay starting up

• Reference voltage is missing

• Frequency not in permitted range

• Neutral earthing switch in intermediate position

Example:

A l a r m s

R e s e t o b l i g a t o r y> L o c k - o u t


0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3

In the example mentioned above the activating of alarm 3 blocks the RPH2. Nooperation is possible, until the "Quit" button is pressed. The output contact "Device notready" (-X6:12/13) is closed.

5.4.3 Alarm List

The following submenus are depending on the configuration of the RPH2. Each internalalarm (message) can be assigned to up to 7 alarm-outputs. The assignment is madethrough the setting of a ‘1’ at the corresponding display-unit.

Example:


F r e q u e n c y m i n F r e q u e n c y m a x

> C u r r e n t m a x ( p e a k )

* R e f . V o l t a g e F a i l u r e 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3



Page 56Issue 3 58.020.034 E2004-02

In the example mentioned above the alarm-message ‘Current max. (peak)’ is assignedto alarm-output 3 and alarm-output 6.

The asterisk (‘*’) at the position ‘Ref. Voltage Failure’ in the picture above indicates thatthe fault ‘Ref. Voltage Failure’ is pending, that means the reference voltage is missing.

Pulse-alarm:

If an alarm-message is a pulse, this alarm-message is active only for a period of 0,5seconds. If this alarm-message is assigned to an alarm-output which is marked as ‘resetobligatory’, the alarm-output remains active until this alarm is acknowledged.

Note: The assignment of an alarm-message to the alarm-output number 8 has no effect.

5.4.3.1 Lock-out

This is only a summary alarm. It is generated by other alarms which cause a blocking of therelay. It is active when the device is blocked (see 5.4.2). The alarm itself causes no blockingof the device!

5.4.3.2 Frequency min

The reference voltage (phase L1) is monitored permanently. If the lower limit of thefrequency is reached, an alarm-message ‘Frequency min.’ is generated.

Limits:

Rated Frequency Lower Limit

50 Hz 45 Hz60 Hz 54 Hz16 2/3 Hz 15 Hz

Note: The monitoring of the frequency is active only if the reference voltage isconnected to the device. If the reference voltage is missing, no alarm ‘Frequency min.’ isgenerated.

5.4.3.3 Frequency max.

The reference voltage is monitored permanently on phase L1. If the upper limit of thefrequency is reached, an alarm-message ‘Frequency max.’ is generated.

Limits:

Rated Frequency Upper Limit

50 Hz 55 Hz60 Hz 66 Hz16 2/3 Hz 18,26 Hz

Note: The monitoring of the frequency is active only, if the reference voltage isconnected to the device. If the reference voltage is missing, no alarm ‘Frequency min.’ is

generated.



Page 57Issue 3 58.020.034 E

2004-02

5.4.3.4 Current max. (peak)

This alarm-message is generated if the setting of the current maximum (peak value) isreached or exceeded during a switching operation in one or more phases (thresholdssee 5.3.1.1)

The peak-value of the current is monitored, not the RMS-value.

This alarm-message is a pulse (see chapter 5.4.3. Pulse-alarm).

This alarm-message is available only for module RPH2-xxI.

5.4.3.5 Reference Voltage Failure

This alarm-message is generated if the reference voltage is missing for more than2 seconds.

Note: This alarm-message blocks the RPH2 in any case, regardless whether the alarmis set for blocking or not (see chapter 5.4.2).

5.4.3.6 RTC Impulse Failure

This alarm-message is generated if the minute-pulse is missing.

5.4.3.7 Neutral intermediate

This alarm-message is generated if the position of the ‘Neutral-switch’ is not defined.

Note: This alarm-message blocks the RPH2 in any case, regardless whether the alarmis set for blocking or not (see chapter 5.4.2).

5.4.3.8 Neutral grounded

This message indicates, that the ‘Neutral-switch’ is in position ‘grounded’. If the position‘grounded’ is indicated, the RPH2 uses the parameter-set ‘Neutral grounded’.

Note: This message is not an alarm-message but may be helpful for supervising

5.4.3.9 Neutral isolated

This message indicates, that the ‘Neutral-switch’ is in position ‘isolated’. If the position‘isolated’ is indicated, the RPH2 uses the parameter-set ‘Neutral isolated’ (see 5.4.3.8).

5.4.3.10 Selftest ERROR

This alarm-message is generated when the automatic selftest discovers an internal error(output circuit is not working correct).


Note: This alarm-message blocks the RPH2 in any case, regardless whether the alarm

is set for blocking or not (see chapter 5.4.2).


This alarm-message is the detailed message from 5.4.3.10 related to channel 1.



Page 58Issue 3 58.020.034 E2004-02



This alarm-message is the detailed message from 5.4.3.10 related to channel 2.


This alarm-message is available only for module RPH2-2xx.


This alarm-message is generated when the command time for channel 1 (the function ofchannel 1 is depending on configuration of the RPH2 and the ‘Function Channel 1’ -chapter 5.1.6) is to short, i. e. perhaps not all three phase are switched within this time.

The alarm is generated if the duration of the command impulse is less than 100 ms.



This alarm-message is generated when the command time for channel 2 (opening) is toshort.

The alarm is generated if the duration of the command impulse is less than 100 ms.


This alarm-message is available only for module RPH2-2xx .

5.4.3.15 Operating Time min

This alarm-message is generated when the measured operating time differs more than 2ms of the calculated operation time (measured time is shorter).


This alarm-message is available only for module RPH2-xxS.

5.4.3.16 Operating Time max.

This alarm-message is generated when the measured operating time differs more than 2ms of the calculated operation time (measured time is longer).





Page 59Issue 3 58.020.034 E

2004-02

5.4.3.17 Drive mech. Failure

This alarm-message is generated when:

• The monitoring of the CB-position is undefined.

• The operating time corrected by adaptive control has drifted away for more than 5 msfor opening and 10 ms for closing from the pre-set operating times (only with adaptivecontrol, see 4.2.5).



5.4.3.18 Archive Full

This alarm-message indicates that the archive is nearly full.


Note: The archive is capable to store 1000 switching operations. When the 900thswitching operation is stored in the archive the alarm-message is generated. Each

switching operation following generates an alarm-message until the archive is read bythe PC-Software RPH-Tool,

5.4.3.19 Archive Failure

This alarm-message is generated, when storing data into the archive fails.


5.4.3.20 Control Voltage min

This alarm-message indicates that the lower limit of the control voltage is reached (seechapter 5.3.1.3 ‘Control Voltage min.).

This alarm-message is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1,RPH2-xxA3.

5.4.3.21 Control Voltage max.

This alarm-message indicates that the upper limit of the control voltage is reached (seechapter 5.3.1.2 ‘Control Voltage max.).

This alarm-message is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1,RPH2-xxA3.

5.4.3.22 Temperature min

This alarm-message indicates that the lower limit of the ambient temperature is reached

(see chapter 5.3.1.5 ‘Temperature min.).

This alarm-message is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1 orRPH2-xxA3.



Page 60Issue 3 58.020.034 E2004-02

5.4.3.23 Temperature max.

This alarm-message indicates that the upper limit of the ambient temperature is reached(see chapter 5.3.1.4 ‘Temperature max.).

This alarm-message is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1 or RPH2-xxA3.

5.4.3.24 Temp. Transducer Fault

This alarm-message indicates an error of the temperature transducer (cable or sensor),i. e. the temperature measurement is not working.

This alarm-message is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1 or RPH2-xxA3.

5.4.3.25 Pressure min

This alarm-message indicates that the lower limit of the hydraulic pressure is reached(see chapter 5.3.1.7 ‘Pressure min.).

This alarm-message is available only for module RPH2-xxA1 or RPH2-xxA3.

5.4.3.26 Pressure max.

This alarm-message indicates that the upper limit of the hydraulic pressure is reached(see chapter 5.3.1.6 ‘Pressure max.).

This alarm-message is available only with modules RPH2-xxA1 or RPH2-xxA3.

5.4.3.27 Press. Transducer Fault

This alarm-message indicates an error of the pressure transducer (cable or sensor), i. e.the pressure measurement is not working.

This alarm-message is available only with modules RPH2-xxA1 or RPH2-xxA3.

5.5 Measurement

5.5.1 Current Graphs

In this submenu you can display the current curves of the last 4 switching operations foreach phase (L1, L2, L3), as well as the maximum currents (peak value).

M e a s u r e m e n t

> C u r r e n t G r a p h s - > M e a s u r e d T i m e s - > F r e q u e n c y

C u r r e n t ( R M S )Y E S

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3



Page 61Issue 3 58.020.034 E

2004-02

Pressing the ‘Enter’-button activates the Graph-mode. Repeatedly pressing the ‘Enter’-button allows to go through the last 4 switching operations. Pressing the ‘+’- or ‘-’-buttonchanges from phase L1 to phase L2 to phase L3 to the peak values of the current ofeach phase. When a graph is displayed, the amplification factor of the graph can bechanged. Pressing the [Quitt] and [+] button at the same time increases theamplification, [Quitt] and [-] button decreases the amplification.

This submenu is available only for module RPH2-xxI.

5.5.2 Measured Times

The measured times of the last switching operation are displayed in this submenu. Thevalues available are depending on the configuration of the RPH2.


C u r r e n t G r a p h s - >> M e a s u r e d T i m e s - > F r e q u e n c y

C u r r e n t ( R M S )

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 L 1 L 2 L 3

5.5.2.1 Command OUT

This submenu shows the measured time from the zero-crossing of the reference voltage(phase L1) until the command is executed.

M e a s u r e d T i m e s - >

> C o m m a n d O U TC B S i g n a l r e c e i v e d

C a l c u l a t e d O p . T i m e M e a s u r e d O p . T i m e

4 . 5 9 . 5 9 . 5 m s

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 L 1 L 2 L 3

Note: The resolution of the time measurement is 0,5 ms.

5.5.2.2 CB Signal received

This submenu shows the measured time from the zero-crossing of the reference voltage(phase L1) until the auxiliary-contacts of the CB are switched.


C o m m a n d O U T> C B S i g n a l r e c e i v e d C a l c u l a t e d O p . T i m e

M e a s u r e d O p . T i m e 1 2 3 . 3 1 2 4 . 1 1 2 3 . 7 m s

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3



Page 62Issue 3 58.020.034 E2004-02

This submenu is available only with module RPH2-xxxS.

Note: The resolution of the time measurement is 0,5 ms.

5.5.2.3 Calculated Operating Time

This submenu shows the calculated operating time according to the measured serviceconditions (temperature, pressure, control voltage). If the compensation facility is notactive, the set values of "Operating Time CH1" (see 5.2.1).and "Operating Time CH2"(see 5.2.2) are displayed.


C o m m a n d O U TC B S i g n a l r e c e i v e d

> C a l c u l a t e d O p . T i m e M e a s u r e d O p . T i m e

1 2 8 . 7 1 2 9 . 0 1 2 9 . 0 m s

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3

5.5.2.4 Measured Operating Time

This submenu shows the measured operating times, assuming that the values for "Aux.Timeshift CH1/CH2" (see 5.2.5, 5.2.6 and 4.1.2.1) have been determined correctly.


C o m m a n d O U TC B S i g n a l r e c e i v e d

C a l c u l a t e d O p . T i m e> M e a s u r e d O p . T i m e

1 2 8 . 9 1 2 9 . 3 1 2 8 . 9 m s

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3

This submenu is available only with module RPH2-xxxS.

Note: The resolution of the time measurement is 0.5 ms.

5.5.3 Frequency

This submenu shows the actual frequency of the reference voltage.

The resolution of the frequency measurement is 0,05 Hz.


C u r r e n t G r a p h s - > M e a s u r e d T i m e s - >

> F r e q u e n c y

C u r r e n t ( R M S )5 0 , 0 0 H z

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3



Page 63Issue 3 58.020.034 E

2004-02

The switching moments (switching programs) are permanently corrected according tothe measured frequency.

Note: The measurement of the frequency works only when the reference voltage isconnected. If the reference voltage is missing the rated frequency is displayed instead.

5.5.4 Current (RMS)

This submenu shows the actual measured line current per phase.


M e a s u r e d T i m e s - > F r e q u e n c y

> C u r r e n t ( R M S )C o n t r o l V o l t a g e

0 0 0 A

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3

This submenu is available only with module RPH2-xxI.

5.5.5 Control Voltage

This submenu shows the actual measured control voltage.


F r e q u e n c yC u r r e n t ( R M S )

> C o n t r o l V o l t a g e A c t u a l T e m p e r a t u r e

6 1 , 2 V

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3


5.5.6 Actual Temperature

This submenu shows the actual measured ambient temperature.

Me a s u r e m e n t

C u r r e n t ( R M S )C o n t r o l V o l t a g e

> A c t u a l T e m p e r a t u r e T e m p e r a t u r e f . C o m p

6 1 , 2 V

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3




Page 64Issue 3 58.020.034 E2004-02

5.5.7 Temperature for Compensation

This submenu shows the averaged environmental temperature (see chapter 4.2)


C o n t r o l V o l t a g e A c t u a l T e m p e r a t u r e

> T e m p e r a t u r e f . C o m p A d d i t i o n . O p . T i m e s - >

+ 0 , 0 C

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3


5.5.8 Additional Operating Times

The following submenus show the calculated additional times according to the serviceconditions and the configuration of the RPH2.

5.5.8.1 Voltage CH1

This submenu shows the compensation value for channel 1 for the actual control voltageper phase.

A d d i t i o n . O p . T i m e s - >

> V o l t a g e C H 1V o l t a g e C H 2T e m p e r a t u r e C H 1T e m p e r a t u r e C H 2

- 0 , 1 - 0 , 1 - 0 , 2 m s

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3

This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxxA0, RPH2-xxxA1, RPH2-xxxA3.

5.5.8.2 Voltage CH2

This submenu shows the compensation value for channel 2 for the actual control voltageper phase.


V o l t a g e C H 1> V o l t a g e C H 2

T e m p e r a t u r e C H 1T e m p e r a t u r e C H 2

- 0 , 1 - 0 , 1 - 0 , 2 m s

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3 This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxxA0, RPH2-xxxA1, RPH2-xxxA3.



Page 65Issue 3 58.020.034 E

2004-02

5.5.8.3 Temperature CH1

This submenu shows the compensation value for the environmental temperaturemeasured for channel 1 per phase.


V o l t a g e C H 1V o l t a g e C H 2

> T e m p e r a t u r e C H 1T e m p e r a t u r e C H 2

- 0 , 1 - 0 , 1 - 0 , 1 m s

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3


5.5.8.4 Temperature CH2

This submenu shows the compensation value for the environmental temperaturemeasured for channel 2 per phase.

A d d i t i o n . O p . T i m e s - >V o l t a g e C H 2T e m p e r a t u r e C H 1

> T e m p e r a t u r e C H 2P r e s s u r e C H 1

- 0 , 1 - 0 , 1 - 0 , 2 m s

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3


5.5.8.5 Pressure CH1

This submenu shows the compensation value for the actual hydraulic pressure

measured for channel 1 per phase.


T e m p e r a t u r e C H 1T e m p e r a t u r e C H 2

> P r e s s u r e C H 1P r e s s u r e C H 2

- 0 , 1 - 0 , 1 - 0 , 1 m s

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3


5.5.8.6 Pressure CH2This submenu shows the compensation value for the actual hydraulic pressuremeasured for channel 2 per phase.



Page 66Issue 3 58.020.034 E2004-02


T e m p e r a t u r e C H 1T e m p e r a t u r e C H 2P r e s s u r e C H 1

> P r e s s u r e C H 2

- 0 , 1 - 0 , 1 - 0 , 2 m s

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 L 1 L 2 L 3


5.5.9 Pressure (L1/L2/L3)

This submenu shows the actual measured hydraulic pressure per phase (L1, L2, L3).


T e m p e r a t u r e f . C o m p A d d i t i o n . O p . T i m e s - >

> P r e s s u r e ( L 1 / L 2 / L 3 ) P r e s s u r e ( L 1 )

3 1 0 3 0 1 3 0 7 b a r

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3

This submenu is available only with module RPH2-xxxA3.

5.5.10 Pressure (L1)

This submenu shows the actual measured hydraulic pressure.


T e m p e r a t u r e f . C o m p A d d i t i o n . O p . T i m e s - >

P r e s s u r e ( L 1 / L 2 / L 3 )> P r e s s u r e ( L 1 )

3 1 0 b a r

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3

This submenu is available only with module RPH2-xxxA1.

5.6 Auxil iary funct ions

5.6.1 Alarm InputThis submenu is for testing only. It shows the inputs (auxiliary contacts and position ofthe neutral earthing switch) of the alarm-board (only available for module RPH2-xxS).



Page 67Issue 3 58.020.034 E

2004-02

5.6.2 Alarm Output

This submenu is for testing only. You can set the alarm-outputs individually by typing a‘1’ at the according position of the pattern shown on the display (only available formodule RPH2-xxS).

5.6.3 Error Type

If an internal fault is detected (selftest interval > 0 h), error flags are displayed in thismenu.

Error type 1: the switching command on input -x8:1 or -x8:6 is still bendingError type 2-4: CH1 phase L1 is defectiveError type 5-7: CH1 phase L2 is defectiveError type 8-10 CH1 phase L3 is defectiveError type 11-13: CH2 phase L1 is defectiveError type 14-16: CH2 phase L2 is defectiveError type 17-19: CH2 phase L3 is defective

5.7 Switching archiveThis submenu shows the result of the last 8 switching operations.

List of messages:

• Switching OK

• NOT Switched (no operation of the breaker)

• Command Time min (command impulse to short (<100 ms))

In the statusline the date and the time of the operation is displayed.

Ahead of the messages a reference to the archive entries is shown:"n" last operation

"n-1" operation beforeetc.



Page 68Issue 3 58.020.034 E2004-02

6 COMMISSIONING

6.1 Commissioning preliminaries

Before initial operation of a RPH2 Point-on-Wave Controller, time should be taken in

order to become familiar with operation of the device and, if a portable PC is available,with the parameterization software also.

NOTE: After the RPH2 is connected to the supply voltage the first time, or after a selftest, it will last about 20 seconds until the green LED is illuminated and the relay isready for operation (see also 2.4.2.2). If the green LED stays dark, please check at firstthe proper connection of the reference voltage and the neutral earthing switch

6.1.1 Settings

6.1.1.1 Factory Settings

Depending on the model, all values for CB-Data, compensation and all thresholds for

the alarms are set to ‘0’, except:

System Frequency: 50 HzControl Voltage: 125 VSwitching Program: TransformerFunction Cannel 1: CB closingSelftest Interval: 24 hCT Rated Current

primary: 1 Asecondary: 1 A

Alarms:Ref. Voltage Failure -> Alarm1

Neutral intermediate -> Alarm2 All other alarm functions are inactive.

6.1.1.2 Necessary Settings

Before the RPH2 is ready to operate, all relevant settings must be completed. Thesedata must be set before the first operation (depending on the model):

• System frequency (5.1.2)

• Control voltage (5.1.3)

• Rated pressure (5.1.4)

• Switching program (5.1.5)

• Function channel 1 (5.1.6)

• Operating times of each pole (5.2.1, 5.2.2)• Arcing Times (5.2.3, 5.2.4)

• All data for compensation and adaptive control (5.2.7....5.2.16)

• Actual control voltage (5.3.4)

• Ratings of external transducers (5.3.5, 5.3.6)



Page 69Issue 3 58.020.034 E

2004-02

All other parameters are not essential for operation.

To evaluate the necessary data, use the configuration checklist shown on the lastpages of this service manual.

6.1.2 Inspection

Check whether the external wiring corresponds to the relevant RPH2 wiring diagram.Particularly whether the reference voltage and the neutral earthing switch positionsignals are wired. If a switching of the neutral is not intended, then it is necessary toshort circuit the relevant input terminals of the RPH2 (-X6:8 with -X8:11 for neutralisolated or -X6:8 with -X8:12 for neutral grounded).

Make sure that the case is properly earthed. If external sensors are necessary, theyare to be installed according to the manufacturer's information. Check whether theplug-in unit is sitting firmly and the fixing screws are tightened.

Measure the actual RPH2 control voltage with a multimeter. This value (depending onthe model) is required for parameterization (5.3.4).Check the 48 V field voltage between the terminals -X6:8 and-X6:11 (ground).

Measure the voltage at the inputs of the external transducers (approx. 24 VDC).

Compare the displayed values on the RPH2 for control voltage, hydraulic pressure andambient temperature (only models RPH2-xxA) with the externally measured ones.

Verify the connections of the voltage and current transformer circuits (current only for

model RPH2-xI) to the correct terminals (100/√3V or 220/√3V, 1A or 5A) of the RPH2.

The two functions of the menu [Aux. Functions] maybe helpful by testing the externalconnections:

The proper connection of the CB’s auxiliary contacts to the RPH2 (only modelRPH2-Sxx) can easily be checked by the function [Aux. Functions][Alarm Input]. When

the circuit breaker is in the closed position you must see three ‘1’ at the first positions inthe status line.

A u x . F u n c t i o n s

> A l a r m I n p u t A l a r m O u t p u t

S e l f t e s t E R R O RR P H 2 V 3 . 0 4 1 6 - 0 3 - 9 9

1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

L 1 L 2 L 3

When the breaker is in the open position, three ‘0’ will be displayed.

If the remote reset input is activated, at the fourth position a ‘1’ must be displayed.



Page 70Issue 3 58.020.034 E2004-02

By using the function [Aux. Functions][Alarm Output] you can activate individually eachalarm relay by typing a ‘1’ at the according position of the pattern. So the externalwiring of the alarm circuits can be checked on correct function.

6.1.3 First operation

When all inspections are done, operate the dead circuit breaker via the RPH2. On

Point-on-Wave-Controllers with option S check, if the measured operating times arecorrect, otherwise adjust the values for [Aux.Timeshift] according to 4.1.2.1. Prove thatthe command impulse to the RPH2 is of sufficient length.

For the first load switchings, we recommend using an oscillograph to measure thecurrents of the three phases together with the reference voltage, in order to verify thatthe unit is working correctly. It is helpful if the three relayed drive commands can alsobe recorded on additional oscillograph traces.

By using a RPH2 with the option I the currents during switching can be displayed andanalysed (see 5.5.1).

If the results are not satisfactory you must adapt the pole operating times and/ or the

arcing times to achieve the optimal function.



Page 71Issue 3 58.020.034 E

2004-02

Configuration Checklist RPH2

System Data

System Frequency 16 2/3 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz

Control Voltage (48V...250V) ........................V

Rated Pressure .........................bar

Switching program: Transformer Shunt Reactor Capacitor Bank

Ο User Program

Point on Wave L1 L2 L3

T_C1 Neutral isolated ms

T_C1 Neutral grounded ms

T_C2 Neutral isolated ms

T_C2 Neutral grounded ms

Function Channel 1 CB Close CB Open (RPH2-1xx only)

Language German English French

Free language ...................................Selftest Interval .............Hours

CB Data:

CB Data L1 L2 L3

Operating Time CH1 ms

Operating Time CH2 ms

Arcing Time CH1 ms

Arcing Time CH2 ms

Aux.Timeshift CH1 ms

Aux.Timeshift CH2 ms

Adaptive Control Weighting Factor ....................

Compensation Yes No

kU1 Voltage CH1 ....................

kP1 Pressure CH1 ....................

kU2 Voltage CH2 ....................

kP2 Pressure CH2 ....................



Page 72Issue 3 58.020.034 E2004-02


Temperature Compensation:Switching Channel 1 Switching Channel 2

Analogue Data:Thresholds:

Current max. (peak) .................... A

Control Voltage max ..................... V

Control Voltage min ..................... V

Temperature max .................... °C

Temperature min ..................... °C

Pressure min ..................... bar

Pressure max .................... bar

Actual Control Voltage .................... V (to be measured and set at site)

CT rated current prim. .................... A

CT rated current sec. 1A 5A

Temperature:Value at 4 mA ..................... °C

Value at 20 mA ..................... °C

Pressure:Value at 4 mA ...................... bar

Value at 20 mA ...................... bar

Temperature Delta_t+50 °C ms

+40 °C ms

+30 °C ms

+20 °C ms

+10 °C ms

0 °C ms

-10 °C ms

-20 °C ms

-30 °C ms

-40 °C ms

-50 °C ms

Temperature Delta_t+50 °C ms

+40 °C ms

+30 °C ms

+20 °C ms

+10 °C ms

0 °C ms

-10 °C ms

-20 °C ms

-30 °C ms

-40 °C ms

-50 °C ms



Page 73Issue 3 58.020.034 E

2004-02


Alarms:

Alarmtext 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Alarm Funct ions

Reset Obligatory

Lock-out Alarm List

Lock-out

Frequency min

Frequency max

Current max

Ref.Voltage Failure

RTC Impulse Failure

Neutral Intermediate

Neutral Grounded

Neutral Isolated

Selftest ERROR

Selftest CH1 ERROR

Selftest CH2 ERRORCommand Time CH1 min

Command Time CH2 min

Operating Time min

Operating Time max

Drive Mech.Failure

Archive Full

Archive Failure

Control Voltage min

Control Voltage max

Temperature min

Temperature max

Temp. Transducer Fault

Pressure minPressure max

Press. Transducer Fault










58.020.035EN

GRID

CHECK--LISTCOMMISSIONNING & MAINTENANCEPoint on Wave type RPH2



58.020.035EN01

Page : 1 / 11

The aim of this document is to describe the different defaults which can occur during the

commissioning and/or the maintenance of the RPH2.

1 Wiring / assembling /schemes

1.1. Standard wiring of the RPH2 with full options and types of cables

to be used for wiring

1.1.1. Circuit-breaker orders :

Orders : shielded cable with earthed screen.

In order to avoid coupling between signals, it is highly recommended to separate the input

signal of the RPH2 (X8-1 & X8-6) and the outputs (X8-2 to X8-4 and X8-7 to X8-9) in 2

different cables (mandatory when the distance between the control room and the CB is above

500m and the auxiliary supply is up to 200Vdc)



58.020.035EN01

Page : 2 / 11

1.1.2. Control inputs and alarm outputs :

Cables : for auxiliary contacts (CB position) it is mandatory to use twisted pairs shielded

cables with earthed screen.



58.020.035EN01

Page : 3 / 11

1.1.3. Reference voltage and current inputs :

Shielded cable with earthed screen.



58.020.035EN01

Page : 4 / 11

1.1.4. Temperature sensor :

twisted pairs shielded cables with earthed screen.

1.2. Earthing

The earthing terminal of the RPH2 (located on the right flange at the rear of the RPH2) must

be correctly wired to the earthing of the cabinet, which is also linked to the ground of thecontrol room.

A default on this earthing can damage the RPH2 in case of potentials coming from the

cables.

1.3. Auxiliary supply

Symptoms :

- No illuminated LED on the front of the RPH2 and no functional screen.

Diagnostic :

- The RPH2 is not switched on. Check the auxiliary voltage between

terminals X6-10 and X6-11

Solutions :

- Check the auxiliary cables otherwise change the RPH2



58.020.035EN01

Page : 5 / 11

1.4. RPH2 not ready

Symptom :

- The green LED « Ready » on the front panel is not illuminated.

Diagnostic :

- Check the reference voltage input, his frequency, the key-switch position

or the detection of an internal fault during the self-test.- Mind the corresponding alarms can be disabled and this can be trappy !

Solution :

- Correct the default parameter

1.5. Order outputs

Symptom :

- The RPH2 works correctly (without any alarm) but the delays between

orders are not as expected and the measured values are null.

Diagnostic :

- Whether the RPH2 is used on opening or tripping, the channel A is with

priority ; Therefore a RPH2-1xxx must be wired between X8-1 for the

order input (opening or closing) and X8-3, X8-4 and X8-5 for the

outputs. If the RPH2-2xxx is used on closing, wired the channel A,

respectively channel B for opening.

Solution :

- Change the wiring from channel B to channel A mainly for a RPH2-2xxx

used on closing

1.6.

Reference voltage

Symptoms :

- Opening and/or closing operation detected but delays on outputs orders

not as expected.

Diagnostic :

- The reference voltage is connected on a phase not corresponding to phase

1 of the RPH2.

Solution :

- Change the wiring of the RPH2 : Make a rotation of the outputs wiring of

the RPH2. The phase corresponding to the reference voltage must be on

terminal X8-3, the next phase on X8-4 and the last one on X8-5 for

channel A, respectively X8-8, X8-9 and X8-10 for channel B.

- Do the same permutation for connections of the auxiliary contacts and the

current measures (if option I available)



58.020.035EN01

Page : 6 / 11

1.7. Too long order

Symptoms :

- Alarm « Command order »

- Even burn of the input order card if the order is continuous.

Diagnostic :- The opening or closing order sent to the RPH2 is too long, even

permanent.

Solution :

- Change the electrical scheme, either by decreasing the impulse time (not

more than 500ms), or put an auxiliary relay to cut the order.

1.8. Inactive screen

Symptoms :

- Black screen or virtually transparent .

Diagnostic :

- Bad contrast

Solution :

- Modify the contrast setting :

1. Turn the key-switch to "OFF“ (Stop).

2. Push the [Enter] key and keep it pushed.

3.

Turn the key on "OPERATION“.4. The contrast is modified from the darkest to the clearest image.

5. When the contrast is optimal, hold off the touch [Enter].



58.020.035EN01

Page : 7 / 11

2 Parameters /configuration problems

These problems may occur mainly on site during the commissioning of the RPH2.

2.1.

green LED « Ready »

Symptom :

Green Led not illuminated

Diagnostic :

Possible reasons :

- The device detected an internal error during its self-test procedure (often

associated with L1 Led error : self-test error)

- The reference voltage is not within the correct values (often associated

with L2 LED error : ref voltage error)

- The measured frequency is out of expected range (programmed value +/-

10%)- The key switch is on the OFF position.

Solution :

- Self-test : try to switch off then on the RPH2 ; if the error remains the

same, then change the RPH2.

- Reference voltage (amplitude or frequency) : analyze of the electrical

scheme within the control room. Check the wiring.

- Switch : turn it to « Operation » position

2.2.

Alarms « com. order min/max » and discrepancy between

calculated and measured values.

Symptom :

Alarm com order min/max illuminated (often L4 : Com order min)

Diagnostic :

The RPH2 is not able to calculate correct values even if the auto-adaptive

correction is set on.

Solution :

Use the « Eliminating Irregular Operating Time Alarms and influence on

adaptive Control” procedure (see annex 1), in reference to the wiring and the

used channel. Check the software version of the RPH2.

2.3. Alarms

2.3.1. Alarms list generated by the RPH2



58.020.035EN01

Page : 8 / 11

-Lock-out : The RPH2 is locked-out, that’s to say it doesn’t work properly.

-Selftest error : if, during the self test procedure, the RPH2 gives an error, (e.g. memory

failed, …), then this alarm is active.

-Selftest CH1 error : Detected error on channel A (intrenal to RPH2).

-Selftest CH2 error : id. For channel B.

-Reference voltage failure : if there is a modification on the network voltage, this alarm

blinks.

-RTC impulse failure : loss of the clock synchronization signal.

-Frequency min : the frequency check is highly important because if the frequency drops

under 90% of the programmed value, the RPH2 is not able to give a good

synchronization. Then the alarm is active above this limit.

-Frequency max : If the frequency is above 110% of the rated one, the RPH2 won’t make a

good synchronization.

-Control voltage min : The coil voltage has a great influence over the operation times and

therefore the operation speed. Below a rated value, we can’t synchronize. This alarm is

then on.

-Control voltage max : id. but for an overrun of the max voltage.-Command time CH1 min : refers to a too short command order . This could induce the

incapability of the RPH32 for giving orders on all phases with the right delays. This

alarm could also happen when a false order (voltage impulse on the command) is seen

by the RPH2. This can be the result of coupling between interconnection cables (from

the BCU or the control room to the CB)

-Command time CH2 min : id. for channel B.

-Current max : When too high currents are detected, this alarm is on. The current limit can

be settled.

-Neutral intermediate : Signals an unwanted state of neutral connection (neither isolated, nor

grounded)

-Neutral grounded : The neutral is grounded (the + polarity is on the terminal X8-12)

-Neutral isolated : The neutral is isolated (the + polarity is on the terminal X8-11)

-Operating time min : signals a too short operating time. Therefore the synchronization is

not possible as the calculated times and the measured times don’t match.

-Operating time max : signals a too long operating time. Therefore the synchronization is

not possible as the calculated times and the measured times don’t match.

-Drive mechanical failure : Default of the mechanical drive ; the corresponding pole position

didn’t change (could also be a problem with auxiliary contact wirings)

-Archive full : The RPH2 is able to store up to 1000 archives ; when we reach 900 records,

this alarm is lighted.

-Archive failure : memory default.-Température min : The CB is able to perform within a temperature range. If the external

temperature drops below the limit, the dispersion in the operating times increase and

then a good synchronization is not possible.

-Temperature max : id. For high temperature.

-Temperature transducer fault : this alarm shows a problem on the temperature sensor or its

wiring.



58.020.035EN01

Page : 9 / 11

-Pressure min : For hydraulic pressure command, the oil pressure is mandatory to determine

the operation times. When the pressure is too low, these times are corrupted.

-Pressure max : id. For higher pressures.

-Pressure tranducer fault : this alarm shows a problem on the hydraulic pressure sensor, or

its wiring.

2.3.2.

Standard alarms list settled within the RPH2 for a spring mechanism)

The following list is based on the standard settings as programmed in AHT factory. These

parameters can be changed, and therefore it is mandatory to check the alarm list before

using this.

Alarm Symptom Diagnostic Solution

L1 : self test error Alarm L1 lighted Internal error

detected during the

self-test procedure.

Try to switch off then

on the RPH2. If the

alarm is always on,

change the RPH2.

L2 : Ref. voltagefailure

Alarm L2 lighted Loss of referencevoltage or bad

frequency value.

Analyze the electricalscheme.

L3 : Control voltage

min/max

Alarm L3 lighted Auxiliary voltage out

of limits.

Check the battery

voltage

L4 : Comm. Time min Alarm L4 lighted Command time on

opening or closing

order is too short

(<100ms)

Analyze the electrical

scheme.

L5 : Neutral

intermediate

Alarm L5 lighted Neutral position

unknown, therefore

the RPH2 is not able

to know the correct

switching program :

check the

connections between

X6-8 and X8-11 or

12 (depending on

neutral position).

L6 : Oper. Time

min/max

Alarm L6 lighted Check the calculated

and measured values

Use the procedure

“Eliminating Irregular

Operating Time

Alarms and Influence

On Adaptive Control”

L7 : Temperature

min/max

Alarm L7 lighted Check the wiring of

the temperature

sensor if the ambienttemperature is inside

the programmed

limits.

Check the cable,

either change the

sensor.



58.020.035EN01

Page : 10 / 11

3 Maintenance problems

3.1. No start-up

Symptoms :- All LEDs are out (even the first green one) but the auxiliary supply is

correctly wired between terminals X6-10 et X6-11

Diagnostic :

- A DC permanent voltage (>35Vdc) is present on the order input signal

(X8-1 for channel A and X8-6 for channel B) and blocks the RPH2.

Solution :

- Check the voltages on terminals X8-1 for channel A and X8-6 for channel

B) during the self-test.

- If there is a permanent DC voltage >35Vdc, 2 solutions are possible : first,using a resistor between the related terminal and the earth (X8-1 for

channel A and X8-6 for channel B) in order to decrease this voltage. For

example : for a measured value of 52Vdc measured on X8-1, a resistor

value equals to 820Ω / 12W should decrease this voltage to 9V and

therefore release the RPH2. Second solution : we can put a signal diode on

X8-1 and X8-6 inputs.

3.2.

Destroy of inputs

Symptômes :

- Some inputs (often the auxiliary contacts inputs) are destroyed (burnt

components on the electronic card).

- High frequency perturbations are bbeing measured on these inputs.

Diagnostic :

- Some composants or the printed circuit of the acquisition card are burnt.

Solution :

- Remplace the corresponding card or the complete RPH2.

- Put a varistor on these inputs (to be calibrated in accordance to the

voltage)between the inputs and the earth.

- Install a filter on the reference voltage input.



58.020.035EN01

Page : 11 / 11

3.3.

Return polarity

Symptoms :

- Some inputs/outputs of the RPH2 (often the auxiliary contacts inputs) are

damaged.

- A DC voltage above 60Vdc is measured on the auxiliary contacts inputs.

Diagnostic :

- Damage of the auxiliary contacts inputs by return polarity.

Solution :

- Try to determine the root cause of this interference voltage and, if

possible, take it out (In case of coupling between cables, it souldn’t be

easy to eliminate)

- Wire a resistor between the concerned input and the earth. Mind this

resistor will heat and then put a protection against unwell contact.







Dismantling and recovery of

components of circuit breaker

L80--000EN021/6


Presentation

In this module This module contains the following subjects:

Subject Page

I -- Introduction 2

II -- General remarks 3

III -- Categories and treatment of the materials:1 -- Treatment of the SF6 gas2 -- Materials to be recycled3 -- Waste products to be destroyed by incineration4 -- Special wastes

4--5






L80--000EN022/6


I -- Introduction

During the elimination phase for a High Voltage gas insulated circuit

breaker, at the end of its service life, the quality of the treatment of wastesgenerated represents the essential environmental aspect.

This manual proposes, for each element of a High Voltage gas insulatedcircuit breaker, the recommended method of elimination for the variousmaterials it comprises, as well as any possible precautions to be taken.






L80--000EN023/6


II -- General remarks

It is necessary to proceed with a maximum amount of dismantling, so as to

ensure the best recycling possible of the materials.

Various categories of materials can be distinguished depending on thewaste processing channel followed:

DSThe SF6 gas to be recycled or reprocessed

DSThe metals to be recycled (without taking into account any surfacetreatment, paintwork or electro--silverplating)

DSWaste products to be destroyed by incineration or sent to the wastedump depending on the channel available.

DSSpecial wastes






L80--000EN024/6


III -- Categories and treatment of the materials

1 -- Treatment of

SF6 gas

The SF6 gas will be recycled in accordance with the recommendations of

the IEC 60480 Standard.

However, when recovering the SF6 gas, it is important to respect the fol-lowing precautions:

-- Weigh the recipients used before and after filling, so as to ensuretraceability of the weights recovered

-- For each recipient, carry out a measurement of the purity of the SF6gas and a search for the decomposition products (SO2, HF)

In case of absence of a local waste processing channel for the recycling of SF6, we recommend a return to our site in Villeurbanne, where we pro-

pose reprocessing via our European service providers.

2 -- Materials to berecycled

Metals form the main constituent of a gas insulated substation.

The main types of metal making up a substation are:

-- Steel: steelwork structure, fasteners, electrical cubicle frames, etc.

-- Aluminium: moulded or mechanical welded enclosures, conductor bars,electrodes, etc.

-- Bolted fasteners, threaded rods, rating and name plates

-- Bare copper: electrical contacts, etc.

-- Insulated copper: electrical cable

It is important to separate these different metals when dismantling the sub-station at the end of its service life. In particular for small sub--assembliesmade up of various materials.

In certain simple cases, it is sufficient to remove the fasteners ensuring theassembly and, in other cases, specific instructions shall be given.

The aluminium and copper elements must, under no circumstances,be mixed. Specific waste processing channels associated with thesematerials do not allow for perfect separation during their processing.

In cases where it is impossible to separate them, the componentmust be sent for incineration.






L80--000EN025/6


III -- Categories and treatment of the materials (contd.)

3 -- Waste products to

be destroyed byincineration

This type of waste includes the rest of the materials used in the composi-

tion of a gas insulated substation, other than for a few very specific cases.

These waste products mainly include:

-- Parts in epoxy resin: insulating cone in the case of circuit breakers withinsertion resistance

-- Plastic parts loaded with glass fibre (insulating tubes, etc.)-- Seals and gaskets, rubber bands, roller bearings

-- Insulators (support or interrupting chamber) composites etc.

Where possible, we recommend that this type of waste be sent via inciner-ation channels with waste heat recovery.

4 -- Special wastes Certain elements, due to their function or the material constituting them,cannot be sent via a recycling or incineration channel.

They include the following components:

-- Insulating parts from the interrupting chamber

-- Absorbent molecular sieves

-- The active elements in electrical cubicles

-- Ceramic insulators (support or interrupting chamber) or those still calledporcelain, etc.

These waste products will follow specific channels and/or undergo certaintypes of processing.Precise instructions will be supplied for these types of components.






L80--000EN026/6





Equipment end of life

Management of SF6 gas

L80--001EN021/6


SF6 gas : Environmental impacts

Introduction The SF6 gas contributes to the greenhouse effect:

The greenhouse effect is a natural phenomena, which by capturing a part of the infra--red rays reflected from ground to space, enables the Earth to havean average temperature of 15°C.

The most abundant gases, which participate in the creation of this green-house effect are Water Vapour, Carbon Dioxide, Methane. However, since thebeginning of the industrial era, Man has released gases into the atmosphere,which artificially increase the greenhouse effect.Even if Sulphur Hexafluoride (SF6) is only present in the environment in lowlevels, it creates a greenhouse gas, which has the capacity to absorb theinfra--red rays emitted by the Earth, which is 22,200 times higher than that of Carbon Dioxide.

N.B. : 1 kg of SF6 gas emissions are, thus, the equivalent of22,200 kg of Carbon Dioxide, which corresponds to the green-house effect gas waste released by a gasoline vehicle covering120,000 km.

SF6 gas is used in High--and Medium--Voltageswitchgear for its breakingandinsulation capacities.The SF6 emissions can be generated in the equipment manufacturing, opera-ting, maintenance and decommissioning processes. The losses are, either,accidental (equipment breakage),or structural (equipment’s leaktightness).Under no circumstances, SF6 gas should be released to the environment:

N.B. : In accordance with the International Kyoto Agreements,European Regulations on fluorinated gases and IEC 62271--303applicable standards (e.g.. IEC 61634), SF6 gas handling opera-tions (filling, recovery) must be carried out by trained and quali-fied personnel, using tools and procedures enabling gas releasesto be limited.





L80--001EN022/6


SF6 gas safety rules

New SF6

D Sulphur Hexafluoride (SF6) is a colourless, odourless and non--toxic gas.

D However, it is a gas, which does not maintain life.

This gas is heavier than air and the lower parts such as trenches or cabletroughs can contain a strong concentration of this gas, which could lead toasphyxia.

N.B. : The maximum permissible concentration on a workstation,assuming that people stay there 8 hours a day, 5 days a week,is 1000 ppm (i.e. 0.1%) of the volume. This very low level is astandard value for all non--toxic gases, which are not usuallypresent in the atmosphere.

Every recipient containing new SF6 gas should be labelled as indicatedbelow:

S 7/9 – Keep container tightly c losed in a well --

ventilated place.

S 20/21 – When using, do not eat, drink orsmoke.

S 45 – In the event of an accident, contact a

doctor immediately (if possible show the doctor

this label).

S61 -- Avoid release to the environment. Refer

to special Instructions / Safety Data Sheet.

S 63 – If inhaled, move the victim out of the

contaminated area and keep them still.

S51 -- Us e only in well ventilated areas.

Clean SULPHUR

HEXALUORIDE

SF6





L80--001EN023/6


SF6 gas safety rules (contd.)

Used SF6 D Under the influence of electrical arcing, SF6 gas can be broken down intosub--products, which are more or less toxic and/or corrosive.

D Depending on their nature, these products can be irritant for the mucousmembranes, the respiratory tracts and the skin.

The SF6 decomposition products are brought to light, even when present invery low levels, by a strong pungent and sulphur odour.

Every recipient containing used SF6 gas should be labelled:Used SF6 gas will be stored in a pressurised, leak--tight container, which mustbe resistant to decomposition products (valves, connectors and piping inclu-ded) and will be regularly inspected in accordancewith thestandards in force.The maximum quantity of polluted gas stored on site will be defined in accor-

dance with the rules in force.

S 7/9 – Keep container tightly closed in a well-- ventilated place.

S 20/21 – When using, do not eat, drink or smoke.

S 38 – In case of insufficient ventilation, wear suitable respiratory

equipment.

S 45 – In the event of an accident, contact a doctor immediately

(if possible show the doctor this label).

S61 -- Avoid release to the environment. Refer to special Instruc-

tions / Safety Data Sheet.

S 63 – If inhaled, move the victim out of the contaminated area

and keep them still.

S 51 -- Use only in well ventilated areas.

(Contains used Sulphur Hexafluoride SF6)

R 26/27/28 – VERY TOXIC BY INHALATION, IN CONTACT

WITH SKIN AND IF SWALLOWED.

C -- C ORROSIVE T+ -- VERY TOXIC

LiquidGAS,

toxic,

corrosive,

n.s.a.





L80--001EN024/6


SF6 gas safety rules (contd.)

Used SF6

For all interventions, it is necessary to respect the following instructions:

In every zone where the SF6 is implemented

D It is forbidden to smoke, eat, drink or store food.

D Ventilation must be sufficient.

D It is forbidden to use a fuel engine.

D Individual protection must be worn, following the table below.

Individualprotection

SF6 Technicalgrade.

Pure SF6 andused gas

without toxicproducts.

ConformingSF6 includinglow levels of toxic products .

Non--conforming SF6including toxic pro-ducts.

SF6 (post--arcing).

Studies of the com-partment containingpolluted SF6.

Wearing of Gloves

Wearing of EyeProtection

Wearing of aSimple FaceMask

Wearing of aCartridge FilterFace Mask

Wearing of aCombination

N.B. : For the elimination, the individual protection is managed in HIW

D Furthermore, the personnel intervening on the equipment, must respect atminimum the following instructions : after draining gas,

-- Remove the SF6 decomposition products immediately after the openingof the equipment in order to avoid a chemical re--combination with water.

-- Ventilation must be sufficient.

-- Use an appropriate vacuum cleaner equipped with a dust filter and wipewith a clean, dry cloth.

-- Avoid shaking the cloth

-- Block the SF6 decomposition products (i.e. molecular sieve, cloth soiledwith a 3% sodium hydroxide solution during 24 h) and destroy as dangerouswaste.

D Avoid contact with soiled parts or dust (Individual Protection)

Soiled individual protection, soiled dusters, soiled molecular sieve, pollutedgas, must be destroyed as dangerous industrial waste. Polluted gas will beincinerated or recycled depending on its level of pollution.





L80--001EN025/6


Transportation of SF6 gas

D Transportation of SF6 gas is considered as a transportion of dangerousmaterials. It must be carried out in accordance with the regulations in force,especially the ADR Regulations in Europe (European Agreement concerningthe International Road Transport of dangerous materials).

D For each transport, each container must be labelled, the label must bevisible and be combined with a Health & Safety / Transportation label and aTransportation slip for dangerous materials must be drawn up.

D In the event of a transportation of SF6 gas containing toxic products(waste), the document for dangerous materials must include the ADR 2.2 TC classification with a Safety Plan. The combined label will be the following :

S 7/9 – Keep container tightly closed in a well-- ventilated place.S 20/21 – When using, do not eat, drink or smoke.S 38 – In case of insufficient ventilation, wear suitable respiratory equipment.S 45 – In the event of an accident, contact a doctor immediately (if possibleshow the doctor this label).S 61 -- Avoid release to the environment. Refer to special Instructions / SafetyData Sheet.S 63 – If inhaled, move the victim out of the contaminated area and keep themstill.

S 51 -- Use only in well ventilated areas.

(Contains used Sulphur Hexafluoride SF6)

R 26/27/28 – VERY TOXIC BY INHALATION, IN CONTACTWITH SKIN AND IF SWALLOWED.

C -- CORROSIVE T+ -- VERY TOXIC

LiquidGAS,

toxic,

corrosive,n.s.a.

USED SF6

SULPHUR

HEXAFLUORIDE

D Loading and unloading operations are carried out by trained and qualifiedpersonnel in accordance with the instructions in force.





L80--001EN026/6


Applicable documentation

International Stan-

dardsD IEC60376: Technical Quality specifications of Sulphur Hexafluoride(SF6)for use in electrical devices.

D IEC 60 480 : guidelines concerning the testing and treatment of SulphurHexaluoride (SF6) sampled on electrical devices and specifications concer-ning re--use.

D IEC 62 271--303 : high--voltage switchgear – use and handling operationsof Sulphur Hexafluoride (SF6) in high--voltage switchgear.

Technical guides D SF6 Practical Handling instructions -- CIGRE Brochure 273 : SF6Practical Handling guide

D SF6 Recycling Guide(Revision 2003) -- CIGRE Brochure 234 -- August

2003 -- PARIS : SF6 recycling guide

European Regula-tions

European Regulations (EC) No842/2006 of 17th of May 2006 concerning cer-tain greenhouse effect fluorinated gases.




Guidelines for the handling of used SF6 gas

and its secondary products

L81--001EN021/4


Presentation

Introduction These maintenance directives incorporate measures for avoiding the hazards

involved in the application of SF6 gas to switchgear.Such directives are protective measures and recommendations for the userof SF6 switchgear.

Fundamentalrules

Instructions for performance of work on SF6 gas switchgear are given in theappropriate instruction manuals.Switchgear may only be opened after the preparations for scavenging havebeen completed.


Topic Page

Evacuation of SF6 gas apparatus 2

Opening--up SF6 gas switchgear 3

Recapitulation of important instructions 4






L81--001EN022/4


Evacuation of SF6 gas apparatus

Principle and

precautions

The table below gives the principle of evacuation of SF 6 gas apparatus and

precautions to take :

Step Action

1 De--energize apparatus, switch--off where applicable and earth.

2 Connect the servicing unit to the gas filling nipple by means of ahose and using an adsorber filter.

3 Remove the SF6 gas using the vacuum pump. Depending on thegas volume ; it can be stored for re--use as per indications of IECstandard.

4 Fill gas compartment if possible with nitrogen or dry compressed airat rated pressure and subsequently, discharge outdoors (if possiblethrough an absorber filter).






L81--001EN023/4


Opening--up SF6 gas switchgear

Precautions to take At the time of the opening--up SF6 gas switchgear, take the precautions

below :

DSOpen--up SF6 switchgear only after the gas has been evacuated and thepressure inside the apparatus has been reduced to that of atmospheric pres-sure.

DSPut the ventilation system in operation or ensure that fresh air circulatesin some other manner when switchgear which contains decompositionproducts is opened (e.g. circuit--breaker).

DSWear suitable fresh air breathing apparatus if there is even the slightestpossibility that personnel working on the equipment could be put in dangerthrough inhalation of hazardous amounts of gas vapor from powdery decom-position products.

DSWear special overalls when working on opened--up SF6 switchgear whichcontains powdery decomposition products. After completing work removeoveralls.

DS Avoid stirring--up dust and powder from SF6 switchgear. Difficult to removedust can be removed with dry non--fibrous rags. A vacuum cleaner should beused to remove loose dust. Thevacuum cleaner filter should be able to retainsparticles of a least 1 m in size.

DS Items (such as rags, vacuum cleaner, throw--away--overalls, gloves, etc.)which come in contact with thedecomposition products must be collected andneutralized so that the dust cannot be transferred. Before getting rid of theseitems neutralize in a 3 percent soda solution for 24 hours. verify the degreeof neutralization after 24 hours. When soda is added, no bubbles should be

result. If there are bubbles repeat the neutralization.DSUnder all circumstances ensure that the decomposition products neithercome in contact with skin, eyes, clothes, nor that they are swallowed orinhaled. Pay special attention to cleanliness of body, clothes and work--bench. Dust or powder that comes in contact with skin must be washed awaywith plenty of water.It is advisable to wash face, neck, arms and hands with soap and plenty of water before work--breaks and after stoppage of work.

DS Avoid eating, drinking, smoking or storing eatables in rooms or outdoorsnear to opened SF6 switchgear which may contain arc--decomposed powder.






L81--001EN024/4


Recapitulation of important instructions

Reminder Pure, non--contaminated SF6 gas is non--poisonous. Electrical discharges

and fault--switching arcs will give rise to different grades of poisonous decom-position products. In small amounts gaseous decomposition products pro-duce -- within seconds and before any poisonous effects can take place --warning symptoms, such as an unpleasant piercing odor, nasal, mouth andeye irritations, which enable working personnel to withdraw to safety. Soliddecomposition products (powdery residues from switching) can cause skinirritations. SF6 is about five times heavier than air, and in theabsence of turbu-lence, results in thegas collecting just above ground level and causing suffoc-ation through a deficiency of oxygen.

Important

instructions

The table below recapitulates the important instructions to follow at the time

of handling of used SF6 gas and decomposition products :No. Instruction

1 As soon as an unpleasant, piercing odor from decomposition productsbecomes perceptible leave the substation room without delay. enterthe room only after thorough ventilation or when wearing suitable oxy-gen breathing masks (with filtering or fresh air device).

2 After disturbances, enter the substation room only after having thor-oughly aired the room or when wearing independent of ambient--airoperating oxygen breathing masks, or alternatively, after verifying bymeasurement that the ambient air contains at least 17% volume of oxygen, especially if, one has to reckon with the concentration of SF6

in hazardous amounts.

3 Enter rooms located below, and connected with the substation--roomsafter thorough ventilation only, or when wearing oxygen breathingmasks which operate independent of the ambient--air, or alternatively,after having verified by measurement that the ambient air contains atleast 17% volume of oxygen.

4 Ensure that the room ventilation operates satisfactorily, whilst main-tenance work is being performed on SF6 switchgear (discharging andfilling of gas, opening and cleaning of equipment).

5 When working on opened SF6 switchgear protect skin against contactwith gas and avoid swallowing or inhaling of gas. Ensure body, clothingand work--bench cleanliness. Wear special work--overalls and aftercompletion of work discard latter.

6 Wash skin which comes in contact with powder deposits with plenty of water. Before work--breaks and after work wash face, neck, arms andhands thoroughly with soap and plenty of water.

7 Do not stir--up powder deposits resulting from arc--switching. Removesticky powder with dry rags. Use suitable vacuum cleaner with paper--filter to remove loose powder. Discard used items and filter--bags insuch a manner that powder deposit does not spread. Before discardingneutralize used items.

8 Avoid eating, drinking and storing eatables in rooms with opened SF6

switchgear which contains powder deposits.



Installation


L31--138EN/031/10


GRID

Presentation

Reminder Frames may be supplied by either ALSTOM Grid or the customer.


Topic Page

Components necessary for the operation 2

Support--frame components (per pole) 3Preparing the column 5

Frame--support assembly 6



Installation


L31--138EN/032/10


GRID

Components necessary for the operation

Necessary product Grease MOBILPLEX 47 -- MOBILUX EP3 (screws greasing).

Necessary tools List of the tools necessary for the installing :


(1) Lifting strap

(3 m) 2

Handling The support--frame assembly operations andliftingthe pole should be performed by at least two per-sons.



Installation


L31--138EN/033/10


GRID

Support--frame components (per pole)

Introduction If the support--frame is supplied by ALSTOM Grid, check the necessary

components to the assembling.

Necessarycomponents



(2) Support 2

(3) Support 2

(5) Screws

H M16-45 1

(7) Screws

H M16-35 16

(9) Washer

NORDLOCK NL16 SS 16




Installation


L31--138EN/034/10


GRID

Support--frame components (per pole), continued

Necessary

components,continued



(20) Screws

H M16-45 16






Installation


L31--138EN/035/10


GRID

Preparing the column

Dismantling the case

of the poles

Remove the side panels of the case.

NOTE : The extraction of the columns will be in the order A, B andC.

Preparing the pole D Sling the “A” column with the aid of two flexible lifting straps (1).

D Extract the column from the case and put it down on the case wood coverlaying :-- first, the end of the column,-- second, the support of the operating mechanism (4) on a wedge to ensurethe correct installing of the frame supports.

X minimumminimum = 260 mm

1

4

1

X



Installation


L31--138EN/036/10


GRID

Frame--support assembly

Process The table below gives the steps of installing the supports of the frame :

Step Action

1 With the aid of two flexible lifting straps, position the frame--support(3) onto the housing (10) and fasten it with the use of the screws (7)and NORDLOCK washers (9). Do not tighten the screws (7).-- Install the screw (5) only on this support.

10

3

2 x 2

H M16--35

79

x 1

H M16--455


102

2 x 2

H M16--35

79




Installation


L31--138EN/037/10


GRID



Step Action


2

2521

3

x 4

H M16--45

20


2 x 2

H M16--35

79

10

2

5 With the aid of two flexible lifting straps, position the frame--support

(3) onto the housing (10) and fasten it with the use of the screws (7)and NORDLOCK washers (9). Do not tighten the screws (7).

10

2 x 2

H M16--35

79

3




Installation


L31--138EN/038/10


GRID



Step Action


25

21H M16--45

202 x 2

3

2

25

21

7 Install the strengthening pieces (24) outside the frame--support withthe use of the screws (20).

24

24

24

24

x 220

H M16--45

x 2

20

H M16--45




Installation


L31--138EN/039/10


GRID



Step Action

8 Tighten all the screws to the recommended torques.

18 daN.m



Installation


L31--138EN/0310/10


GRID




Installation

Lifting and positioning the pole

L31--200EN/061/4


Presentation

Necessary tools List of the necessary ALSTOM Grid tools for the lifting and positionning of the

pole :


(1) LIFTING STRAP

” SPANSET” (3 m -- 1000 kg) 2


Topic Page

Lifting the pole 2

Positioning the pole 3

Warning “Procedure limited to pole installation only. For removal, contact

ALSTOM.”“Any faults or cracks in the column may render the procedure

dangerous.”



Installation


L31--200EN/062/4


Lifting the pole

Process Install the two flexible lifting straps (1), placing these at the end of the column.

By means of a lifting device hoist the pole up whilst allowing it to rest on thebase of the frame.Place the trip ropes (10) on the support legsof the chassis frame (9) to ensureguidance of the pole at the time of lifting.Lift the pole with precaution.

10

9

1



Installation


L31--200EN/063/4


Positioning the pole

Process The table below gives the steps of positioning the pole :

Step Action

1 Use a lifting device to position the chassis frame onto its groundattachment points but do not secure it, whilst respecting theorient-ation of the pole indicated on the sketch of the device.

2 If necessary, place shims under the supports of the frame so thatthe upper plate is level.

3 Install the washers (12) and clamp the whole to the ground usingnut.

4 Remove the lifting straps.

518 daN.m

Check the tightening torques of all frame screws.

6 Tightenthefixingson the two floor seatings inaccordance with themodule entitled ’Tightening Torques’ and in accordance with thediameters of the anchoring points.

12



Installation


L31--200EN/064/4





Installation



L31--504EN/031/4


Presentation

Diagram


Topic Page

Components, products and accessories 2

Preparing the contact surfaces 3

Installing terminals 4



Installation



L31--504EN/032/4


Components, products and accessories

Necessary

components


pole) :


(1) Terminal 2

(3) Screws

H M12--45 8

Necessary productsand accessories

List of the ALSTOM Grid products and accessories necessary for the instal-ling :

ALSTOMGrid


--01861262 ISOPROPANOL (1 l)

Can of ISOPROPANOL (1l)

--01835106 204--9Vaseline 204--9

--01835118 Contactal grease

--01831320 A400

Abrasive paper A400

--02212337 Scotch Brite A--VF

--02212334 Rag

--02211842 N°4

Round brush No.4

--02211831 N°16

Brush No.16



Installation



L31--504EN/033/4


Preparing the contact surfaces

Preparing the

contact grease

The contact grease is a mixture composed of Vaseline and Contactal grease.

CONTACT GREASE = 50% Vaseline + 50% Contactal grease

Preparing thecontact surfaces

The table below gives the steps of preparing the contact surfaces :

Step Action Diagram

1Remove the temporary screwsfrom the terminal pads X1 and

X2.

X1

X2

2 Dry rub with fine emery cloth.

3 Eliminate the dust produced.

4 Coat with CONTACT

GREASE.

5 Wipe with a clean rag, leaving just a thin layer of grease.

6 Rub over the grease with wa-terproof abrasive paper A400.



Installation



L31--504EN/034/4



Process Assembleimmediately the terminals (1) on the interruptingchambers (2) after

preparation of contact surfaces. Fasten the terminals using screws (3); useCONTACT GREASE to seal the screws.

x 4

H M12--455 daN.m

3

22

2

1

Comment D The electrical resistance value of the assembly should be :

R ≤ 2μΩ

D Before installing H.V. connectors, prepare the contact surfaces in thesame way.



Installation


L31--605EN/021/4


Presentation

Diagram

Necessary tools List of the tools necessary :


(12) Lifting strap

(3 m) 2


Topic Page

Components and products 2

Preparing the capacitors 3

Installing the capacitors 4



Installation


L31--605EN/022/4


Components and products

Necessary

components


pole) :


(1) Capacitor 2

(3) Support 2

(4)or

Support(depending on the apparatus)

2

(5) Screws

H M12-30 8

(8) Screws

H M12-45 4

(9) Screws

H M12-25 4

(1) Spacer 4

Necessary products S MOBILPLEX 47 -- MOBILUX EP3 : screw greasing.



Installation


L31--605EN/023/4


Preparing the capacitors

Installing

the supportsS Install the support (3) on the capacitor (1) using the screws (5).

S Install the support (4) on the capacitor (1) using the screws (5).

4

3

x 2

H M12--305 daN.m

5

4

x 2

H M12--305 daN.m

5

1



Installation


L31--605EN/024/4



Process Install the capacitors (1) on the interrupting chambers (6) and (7) -- on the

opposite side as the bosse of the housing (13) -- using the screws (8)and (9).

NOTE : Use the two spacers (10) to install the capacitors -- capacitorsupport (4) side.

To avoid the rotation of the interrupting chambers, insert a wedge (13)under the supports of the capacitors (3)--(4) after installing.

10

x 2

H M12--455 daN.m

8

10

4

1

1

4

13

x 2

H M12--255 daN.m

9

7

6

x 2

H M12--255 daN.m

93 -- 4

13



Installation


L31--664EN/021/4


Presentation

Diagram


Topic Page

Preparing the stress--shields 2

Installing the stress--shields 3



Installation


L31--664EN/022/4


Preparing the stress--shields

Necessary



pole) :


(1) Stress--shields ring 2

(2) Bracket 8

(3) Screws

H M10-30 8

Necessary product MOBILPLEX 47 -- MOBILUX EP3 : screw greasing.

Assembling Install the brackets (2) on the stress--shields ring (1) using screws (3) do nottighten.

x 4H M10--30

3

2

1



Installation


L31--664EN/023/4


Installing stress--shields

Necessary



pole) :


(5) Screws

H M12-30 8

Necessary product LOCTITE 262 (screws locking)

Process Install the stress--shields (1) at each end of the interrupting chambers (4)using the screws (5).

NOTE : Lock the screws (5) with “LOCTITE 262”.

1

1

1

4

4

x 4

H M10--303,2 daN.m

5

x 4

H M12--305 daN.m

5



Installation


L31--664EN/024/4





Installation


L31- 7138EN / 011/16


Presentation

Markings Before coupling the chambers and column, check that the markings on the

breaking chambers correspond with those on the column

Time taken forcoupling operation

The final chamber/column coupling operations should be completed in atime of ≤ 40 min.

NOTE: The coupling operations must be carried out by a minimumof two people.

T(max) ≤ 40 min

Lifting means Provide an adequate means of hoisting:3,000 daN (minimum).

An aerial basket is mandatory.

H + 2 m

H

Stages of thecoupling operation

The chamber- column coupling operation can be broken down into a num-

ber of stages:Step Subject Page

A Preparing the column’s corona shield 2

B Preparing the elements required for the coupling opera-

tion 3

C Hoisting and preparing the breaking chamber 5

D Final coupling 6



Installation


L31- 7138EN / 012/16


Preparing the column’s corona shield

Elements required:

ALSTOM Grid

List of ALSTOM Grid elements required for assembly (per pole):

Mark Illustration Description Quant-ity

(50) Corona shields 1

(51) Lugs 4

(52) Fittings

H M10-30 4

Assembly Attach the lugs (51) to the corona shield (50) using the fittings (52) without

overtightening.

50

51

52

x 4H M10- 30

Positioning Temporarily fit the corona shield (50) to the base of the first isolator on thecolumn (1).

1

50



Installation


L31- 7138EN / 013/16


Preparing the elements required for the coupling operation

Elements required:

ALSTOM Grid

List of ALSTOM Grid items necessary for the operation:


(20) Seal 1

(21)

ScrewsH M16- 65 (19 mm)H M16- 75 (30 mm)

8

(22) Washer

M16 16

(23) Nut 8

(24) Coupling pin 1

(25) Circlips 1




Installation


L31- 7138EN / 014/16


Preparing the elements required for the coupling operation, continued

Tools required

ALSTOM Grid

List of ALSTOM Grid tools necessary for the operation:


(30)(31)

”Short” centring pin”Long” centring pin

1

(32) Lever 1

(33) Protective mask 1

(34) Trolley stop 1

(35) Fitting tool for

coupling pin 1

(37) Circlip clamp

(not supplied) 1

Products required S MOLYKOTE M111 Grease: greasing contact surfaces

S LOCTITE 225: locking fitting in place

S MOBILPLEX 47 - MOBILUX EP3: greasing fittings



Installation


L31- 7138EN / 015/16


Hoisting and preparing the breaking chamber

Raising the breaking

chambers

Using two slings, lift the chambers and LEVEL THEM, the casing (2) should

be at head height (approximate weight: 700 kg).

2

Assembling the

centring pins

Fit parts A, B & C to the centring pins (30) & (31) without locking them in place

so that they may be easily removed later on.NOTE: Pin (31) is longer than pin (30).

30

AB

C31

Depressurizingthe chambers

S Remove the cap (5) from the transport cover (4) and operate the valve (6)to re- establish atmospheric pressure within the chambers.REMINDER: transport pressure nitrogen: azote (N2) at 0.03 MPa at 205C(101.3 kPa).

S Refit the cap (5).

56

4




Installation


L31- 7138EN / 016/16


Final coupling

Orientation of the

chambers

To aid later identification of the chambers it is of the utmost important that they

be coupled the right way round.There are two ’humps’ (B1 & B2) on the casing (2).Set the chambers level with the column (1) so that the humps (B1 & B2) onthe casing (2) are on the same side as the control mounting (3).

2

3

1B2

2

B1




Installation


L31- 7138EN / 017/16



Removing the




1 Remove the fixings (40) andinsert the lever (32) throughthe bracket rings (7).Pull on the lever (32) to openthe cover (4).Hold on two two of the coverbolts (40) for later use.

32

x 8

H M16- 55

40

7

4

2 Start timing.(The final chamber/columncoupling operations shouldbe completed in a time of ≤ 40 min).

3 Pull off the cover (4) to freethe stop ring (8) and ’Rilsan’collar (9).

9 8

4

4 Using wire cutters, cutthrough the ’Rilsan’ collar (9)holding the connector tubeand remove it.

9

5 Using the coupling tool (35),remove thetube (10) and sep-arate the cover (4) from thestop ring (8).

8

10

354




Installation


L31- 7138EN / 018/16



Removing the




6 Fit the trolley stop (34) and fixin place using the bolts (40)recovered from the transportcover, hand tightening them.

x 2

H M16- 55

34

40

7 Prepare the fitting tool (35)by screwing the coupling pin(24) onto its end, hand tight-ening.

3524




Installation


L31- 7138EN / 019/16



Fitting the

centring pins

Fit the centring pins (30) & (31) hard against the spherical casing (2), lightly

tighten the nuts (41).Fit the screws (42) to the centring pins (30) and (31).

4141

2

30

42

31

42

Removing the columncover

The table below shows the steps for removing the column cover:


1 Remove the fittings (43) andopen the cover (11).

11

x 8

H M16- 55

43

2 Turn the cover (11) through90° to remove it.

11




Installation


L31- 7138EN / 0110/16



Fitting the seal The table below shows the steps for fitting the seal:



A

B

2 Fit a new seal (20) and placeit on surface ”A”, referring to”Preparing and fittingstatic seals”.

See module ’Generalassembly procedures’.

20 A

3 Fit the protective cover (33).

33




Installation


L31- 7138EN / 0111/16



Fitting the

coupling pin



1 Slowly lower the breakingchambers (2), inserting thecentring pins (30) & (31) intothe holes in the columnflange (1).

Make sure both pins are cor-rectly aligned.

1

12

30

8

31

2

2 Slower lower the breakingchambers (2) to align the pinwith the holes in the cylinder(8) and the rod (12).

3 Insertthe fitting tool (35)withthe coupling pin (24) on itsend.

24

35

4 Slightly loosen the twoscrews holding the trolleystop (34) in place andremove it.

34




Installation


L31- 7138EN / 0112/16



Fitting the

coupling pin



5 Fit the coupling pin (24) bymanually pulling on the fittingtool (34) until it stops on thecylinder (8).

24

8

35

6 Fit the circlips (25), slidingthem along the fitting tool (35)using circlips pliers (37).See the second method (7).

25

35

37

7 Remove the fitting tool (35)from the coupling pin, loosen-ing it by hand.Second method:Fit circlips (25) using circlippliers (37).

25 37

35




Installation


L31- 7138EN / 0113/16



Connection

chambers/column




Remove the trolley stop fixingscrews (40).

40

A

B

2 Remove the screws (42) fromthe centring pins.

4242

3 Continue to slowly lower thebreaking chamber, removingthe first two sections of cent-ring pin (30 & 31) when theyare no longer of any use as aguide, in the following order:- First section (C)- Screw (42)- Second section (B)

NOTE: The aim of thisoperation is to prevent thecentring pins coming intocontact with the porcelainfins on the column.

3031

(C)

(B)

(42)




Installation


L31- 7138EN / 0114/16



Connection

chambers/column



4 Slowly lower the breakingchamber casing (2) onto thecolumn.Position the lugs (51) for thecorona shield (50) on the rimof the column then attachusing bolts (21), washers (22)and special nuts (23) - See’Locking Fixings’.See module ’Generalassembly procedures’.


x 4H M10- 303,2 daN.m

52

2

H M16- 65 (75)13,5 daN.m

x 6

21

22

23

51

50

5 Tighten all fixings (52) to theirappropriate torque level.

6 End of coupling operation -stop the timer and note thetime taken.

7 Remove the last section (A)and the nut (41)fromthe cent-ring pins.Fix the last bolts (21), wash-ers (22) and special nuts (23)referring to ”Locking fix-ings”.See module ’Generalassembly procedures’.


(A)

41

H M16- 65 (75)13,5 daN.m

x 2

23

22

22

21




Installation


L31- 7138EN / 0115/16



Vacuum extraction

andfilling with gas

Once the coupling operation has been completed, continue with:

S The air extraction operation

S The gas filling operation



Installation


L31- 7138EN / 0116/16





Installation


L31--7902EN/011/12


Presentation

Necessary product G r e as e MO B I L PL E X 4 7 or M O BI L U X E P 3 ( s c re w s g r e as i n g)

NecessaryALSTOM Gridtools

L i st o f t h e A L S TO M G r id t o ol s n ec es sa ry f o r t h e i ns t al li ng :


(1) Lif t ing st rap 1

(6) Lever 1

Lifting equipment P r o vi d e a n a p pr o p ri a t e l i f t in g e q ui p m en t (3 0 0 d a N) .

Process T h e t a b le b e lo w g i ve s t h e s t e ps o f i n s ta l l in g t h e o p er a t i ng d e vi c e o n t h epole--support :

St ep Topic Page

A P reparing the operating device 2

B Preparing t he pole operat ing shaf t 3C Coupling t he operat ing device 6

D Fast ening the operating device 8

ER e mo v in g t h e b l oc k i ng t o o l

10

F Low volt age elect rical wiring 11

G Permanent heat ing syst em 12



Installation


L31--7902EN/012/12



Unpacking R e mo v e p a ck a gi n g p r o te c t i on a n d c h ec k t h a t o p er a t in g d e vi c e a n d p o le

r e f er e nc e n u mb e r s a r e t h e r i gh t o n es .

Optical signalizations C h ec k t h e p o si t i on o f o p e r a t in g d e v i ce o p t ic a l s i g na l iz a t i on :


Closing spring

Released

Necessarycomponents



(11) Seal 1

(22) Spacer 4

Installing thenecessarycomponents

-- I n s t al l t h e s p a c er s ( 2 2 ) o n t h e s c re w s ( 9 ) o u t si d e t h e o p er a t in g d e v i c e.

-- I n s t al l t h e s e al ( 11 ) o n t h e o p e r at i n g s h a f t ( 1 3 ) .

-- C h ec k t h e p r es e n ce o f g r ea s e ( A S E OL 0 -- 3 6 5 . 2) o n t h e o p er a t in g s h a f t

(13).

13

x 49

22

11



Installation


L31--7902EN/013/12


Preparing the pole operating shaft

Introduction F o r t r an sp or t th e p ol e i s f i t te d w it h a s ec ur i ng to ol ( 4) an d a sa f et y pl a te (5 ),

t e m p o r a r i l y a t t a c h e d t o t h e e n d o f t h e h a n d l e ( 1 2 )To f i t t h e o p er a t in g l e ve r, y o u m u s t :a -- R e mo v e t h e s e cu r in g t o o l ( 4 ) .b -- Manually open the pole.c -- R e f i t t h e s e cu r in g t o o l ( 4 ) ( “ o pe n ” p o si t i o n).d -- R e mo v e t h e s a f et y p l at e ( 5 ).

4

5

12

5

7

Grease C he ck t h e p re se nc e o f g re a se ( A SE O L 0 -- 3 6 5. 2 ) o n t h e p ol e o pe ra t in g s h af t .




Installation


L31--7902EN/014/12




operation



1 Remove t he securing t ool( 4 ) t h en s cr e w t h e o pe ra t in gl ev er ( 6 ) o n t o t h e f l a n ge o nt he f ront of t he handlesleeve (12).

12

4

6

2 W it h t he help of t he lever ( 6),e ff ec t a 6 0° r ot a ti on o f t h esleeve (12).

6

12



Installation


L31--7902EN/015/12




operation, continued



3 Put b ack t he b locking t ool(4) on t he f lange of t hesleeve (12).

NOTE : T hi s t ool ensuret h e a ng ul ar p os it i on in g o f pole operat ing shaf td ur ing t he c oup li ng w it ht h e o p er a t in g m e ch a ni s m .

6

412

4

M10

4 Remove t he l ev er (6).

5 R em ov e t he s af et y p lat e ( 5)and t he s crews f rom t hef lange on t he f ront of t hehandle sleeve (12).

12

58



Installation


L31--7902EN/016/12


Coupling the operating device

Necessary

components



(10) Washer

M20 4

(22) Spacer 1

(26) Spacer 1

(23) Eccent ric spacer 2

(14) NutH M20 4

(24) Wedge (t hickness 1 mm) 1

(25) Wedge (thickness 0,5 mm) 2




Installation


L31--7902EN/017/12


Coupling the operating device, c o n t i n u e d

Coupling T h e t a bl e b el ow g iv es t h e s t ep s o f t h e o pe r at i ng d ev ic e c ou pl in g :

St ep Act ion

1 S li n g th e op er at i ng d e vi ce u s in g a l if t i ng s t ra p ( 1) l i ke d i ag r am .

NOTE : D o n ot r em ov e t he r oo f ( 17) o f t he o pe ra ti ng d ev ic eb e f or e s l i ng i ng .

2 L if t t he o pe ra ti ng d ev ic e an d ma ke t hi s le ve l. A pproximate weight 300 kg.

3 A pp ro ac h t he o pe ra ti ng d ev ic e i n a ss em bl y p os it io n, t he j ib o f t he l if t -i n g e q u i pm e n t m u s t b e u n de r t h e s t r es s -- s h i e ld s r i ng ( t o a v oi d t h a tthe cables touch the stress--shields ring).

The final approach must be done with extreme caution.

4 I n t ro du ce t h e o pe r at i ng m e ch an is m s ha f t ( 13 ) i nt o t h e c yl i nd er ( 1 2)o f t h e p o l e o p er a t in g s h af t .

5 A s so on a s th e lo we r fa st en in g sc re w (9 ) “A” e m e r g e f r o m t h e h o l eo f t h e o pe ra t in g m e ch an i sm s up po r t ( 8) , i ns t al l t h e s pa ce r ( 26 ) ,w a s h e r ( 1 0 ) a n d t h e n u t ( 1 4 ) .


17

12

13

8

”A”

8

1

14

9

10

26



Installation


L31--7902EN/018/12


Fastening the operating device

Installing

the fastening nuts

T h e t a b le b e lo w g i ve s t h e s t e ps o f i n s ta l l in g t h e o p er a t i ng d e vi c e f a s t e n i ng

n ut s :

St ep Act ion

1 I ns ta ll t he s pa ce r ( 22 ), wa sh er ( 10) a nd t he n ut ( 14 ) o n t h e l ow erf a s t e n i n g s c r e w “B”.


2 I n st a ll t h e ec ce nt r ic s pa ce rs ( 2 3) , w as he rs ( 1 0) a n d th e nu t s ( 14 ) o nt h e u p pe r f a s t en i ng s c r ew s “C” a n d “D”.

NOTE : Do not t ight en t he nut s ( 14).

3 R ot at e t he e c ce nt ri c s pa ce rs ( 2 3) t o d o t h e c on ta ct w i th t h e l ow eredge of the pole--support oblong holes.

4 T ig ht e n -- t e mp or a ri l y a t t h e i nd ic at e d t i gh t en in g t o rq ue -- t h e f as t en -i n g s c r ew s ( 9 ) .

22 x 1

23

10

14

x 2

10

14

23

5 daN.m

9

”B”

”C”

”D”




Installation


L31--7902EN/019/12


Fastening the operating device, c o n t in u e d

Wedging

and tightening

T he t ab le b el ow g iv es t he w ed gi ng p ro ce du re f or t he f as te ni ng s cr ew s

d ep en di ng t o t h e X p l a y :

X

22

20Important

35 daN.m

2425

If the X play is ... Action

X <1 mm Tighten to the indicated tightening

torque.

X ≥1 mm

D W ed ge b et w ee n t h e s pa ce r ( 2 2)a nd t h e o pe ra t in g d ev ic e ( 2 0) w it h t h eprovided wedges (24)--(25).

D Tighten the screw to theindicated tightening torque.

Lifting strap R e mo v e t h e l i f t i ng s t r a p.



Installation


L31--7902EN/0110/12


Removing the blocking tool

Process REMOVE THE BLOCKING TOOL (4).

4



Installation


L31--7902EN/0111/12


Low voltage electrical wiring

Process C on ne ct u p t h e o pe ra t in g d ev i ce ’s w ir es r e fe r t o t h e w ir i ng d ia gr a m o f t h e c i r-

cuit--breaker.C o nn e ct u p t h e o p er a t i ng d e vi c e’ s w i re s .

NOTE : Use t he holes pr ovided on t he support s of t he f rame t o f ixt h e c a bl es .

Connecting up thecontact densimetercable

C o n n e c t t h e w i r e s f r o m t h e e l e c t r i c a l c o n t a c t S F 6 d e ns i m et e r ( 1 8) c a bl e ( 1 9 )t o t h e o p er a t in g m e ch a ni s m t e r m i n al b l oc k , i n a c co r d an c e w i t h t h e r e la t i v ediagram.

18

19



Installation


L31--7902EN/0112/12


Permanent heating system

Process S wi t ch o n t h e p e r ma ne nt h ea t in g s ys t em o f t h e o p e ra t in g d ev ic e ( i n b o t h s u m -

m e r a n d w i n t e r ) t o a v o i d c o n d e n s a t i o n , a n d t h e c o r r o s i o n w h i c h m i g h t r e s u l tf r o m t h i s.

D O N O T S U PP LY T H E O P E R AT I N G M E CH A NI S M M O T OR W I T H C U R-R E NT T O AV O I D T H E C L OS I N G S P RI N G B E I NG R E LO A D ED .THE CIRCUIT BREAKER MUST NOT BE OPERATED AT A SF6 PRES-SURE GAS LOWER THAN THE MINIMAL PRESSURE FOR THE INSULA-TION pme.




Documents

Manual Gl317x Rph2